JP7828648B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In pachinko games, there are known types of games that transition from small win games to big win games (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-184834

Incidentally, the aforementioned gaming machines had visuals that were difficult for players unfamiliar with the game to understand, leading to a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In view of these circumstances, the present invention aims to improve the enjoyment of gaming.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a specific area into which a game ball can be entered, a normal area different from the specific area into which a game ball can be entered, an acquisition means for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is met, a predetermined game control means for controlling the execution of a predetermined game that allows a game ball to be entered into the specific area based on the determination information, a special game control means for controlling the execution of a special game that is advantageous to the player when a game ball is entered into the specific area in the predetermined game, an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect, and an operation means that can be operated by the player, wherein if a game ball is not entered into the specific area in the predetermined game, the special game is not executed, the effect control means is capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value , and if a game ball is not entered into the specific area in the predetermined game It is possible to perform a ball entry promotion performance to encourage the ball to enter, and when a game ball enters the specific area, it is possible to perform a ball entry notification performance, and when the ball entry promotion performance is being performed in the predetermined game, the predetermined information is not displayed, and when the ball entry notification performance is being performed, the predetermined information is not displayed, and when the special game is performed after the predetermined game has finished, the predetermined information is displayed, and when a game ball enters the normal area during the execution of the special game, it is possible to perform a predetermined performance to cause the user to operate the operating means during the execution of the special game, and it is possible to notify the result of the predetermined performance even if the operating means is not operated during the predetermined performance, and it is possible to display the predetermined information during the execution of the predetermined performance, and when a game ball enters the normal area When a ball enters the area, the predetermined information can be updated and displayed . If the game value of the predetermined information reaches a predetermined upper limit due to the updated display, the update display will not be performed even if a game ball enters the normal area thereafter. A notification effect indicating the likelihood of the special game being executed can be performed. A specific reach effect indicating whether or not the special game will be executed can be performed. The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect different from the first notification effect. The first notification effect may be performed using a predetermined color or using a specific color different from the predetermined color. The second notification effect may be performed using a predetermined color or using a specific color. The probability of the special game being played is higher when the first予告演出 (preview performance) using the specified color is performed a second time, which is more than the first time, compared to when the first preview performance using the specified color is performed a first time. On the other hand, the probability of the special game being played is constant whether the second preview performance using the specified color is performed a first time or a second time, which is more than the first time. The first preview performance can be played before the execution of the specified reach performance, the first preview performance is not played during the execution of the specified reach performance, the second preview performance can be played during the execution of the specified reach performance, and the second preview performance is not played before the execution of the specified reach performance .

According to this invention, the enjoyment of gaming can be improved.

This is an external front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is an external rear view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the present invention, with (A-1) a special symbol win determination table for the first start port, (A-2) a special symbol win determination table for the second start port, and (B) a normal symbol win determination table. This figure shows (A) a special symbol determination table, (B) a regular symbol determination table, and (C) details of the rounds for each winning special symbol according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a special pattern variation table according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a command table (1/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a command table (2/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the setting value change process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the setting value confirmation process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing on the main control board according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the input SW detection process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the first start port detection process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the second start port detection process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the process when detecting the second large prize slot according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the special pattern-related processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the special pattern variation start process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the special symbol hit detection process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the special pattern variation processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot 1 game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the small win game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the second type of jackpot transition control process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot 2 game processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control board according to an embodiment of the present invention. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing on the performance control board according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the main command reception process (1/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart of the main command reception process (2/2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a prediction determination table 1 (pre-reach prediction) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a dialogue preview determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a button vibration notification determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows a prediction determination table 2 (prediction during reach) according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows (a) a logo announcement determination table and (b) a car group announcement determination table according to embodiments of the present invention. (a) This figure shows a prediction determination table 3 (prediction during super reach - conversation prediction) according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) This figure shows a prediction determination table 4 (prediction during super reach - cut-in prediction). (c) is a diagram showing a prediction decision table 5 (judgment during super reach) according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (d) is a diagram showing a performance button decision table. This figure shows an embodiment of the dialogue announcement according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the button vibration notification according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the logo preview according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the vehicle group preview according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the cut-in preview according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the judging presentation according to the present invention. This is a diagram showing an embodiment of the conversation announcement according to the present invention. This is a diagram showing an embodiment of the conversation announcement according to the present invention. This is a diagram showing an embodiment of the conversation announcement according to the present invention. This is a simplified time chart (normal game state) of the variable animation according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the jackpot 1 gameplay entry judgment sequence (jackpot judgment) according to the present invention. This figure shows an embodiment of the mode selection presentation during a jackpot 1 game according to the present invention. This figure illustrates the details of the presentation of the minor win game and the major win 2 game when Mode A is selected according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows the modes of the minor win game and the major win 2 game when Mode A is selected according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows the mode of the continuation judgment performance (judgment during jackpot) during jackpot 1 game and jackpot 2 game according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows various tables for icon presentation according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows various tables for icon presentation according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows various tables for icon effects according to an embodiment of the present invention, and effect tables for gameplay during jackpot 1 and jackpot 2. This diagram shows the presentation tables during the first and second jackpot games according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows the mode selection presentation for each mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows the modes (modes during RUSH) during the time-saving game state according to the embodiment of the present invention. This is a flowchart showing the performance status monitoring process according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an overview of the measurement and display during RUSH according to an embodiment of the present invention. This figure shows an overview of the measurement and display during RUSH according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below, using a pachinko game machine 1 as an example and referring to the drawings. In the following description, "front," "rear," "left," "right," "up," and "down" refer to the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Figure 1 as viewed from the player's perspective.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko game machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine island (not shown) in a game parlor, an inner frame 3 pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and detachably holding the game board 6, a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the inner frame 3 and facing the front of the game board 6, allowing the game board 6 to be viewed through transparent glass, and a receiving tray member 5 pivotally supported by the inner frame 3 and located below the glass frame 4, capable of storing game balls.

The central frame 3 is equipped with a launching device for firing game balls into the game area 7 of the game board 6, and a launching handle 8 is provided to operate this launching device. The launching handle 8 can be held by the player and rotated within a predetermined range, and the amount of rotation (volume) allows adjustment of the launching strength when firing game balls into the game area 7. For example, when rotated by a first amount (first launching strength), game balls are fired to the left side of the game area 7 (game area 7a) (so-called "left-handed shooting" is possible), and when rotated by a second amount greater than the first amount (second launching strength), game balls are fired to the right side of the game area 7 (game area 7b) (so-called "right-handed shooting" is possible). Game area 7a forms a predetermined path, and game area 7b forms a specific path.

The launch handle 8 is equipped with a handle touch sensor (not shown). This handle touch sensor turns ON when the launch handle 8 is being held by the player, and this ON signal is input to the payout control board 300. This allows the system to detect whether the launch handle 8 is being held by the player.

The glass frame 4 is equipped with a light-emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.), allowing the pachinko game machine 1 to be decorated with light. For example, in the special symbol win detection process described later, if a special symbol win is detected, the device can emit rainbow-colored light to indicate that a special symbol win has occurred.

The light-emitting device 9 includes an LED for the performance button 14. The LED is located inside the performance button 14 and is covered from above by a transparent cover, making its illumination pattern visible. For example, the LED can emit light in white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors.

Furthermore, a speaker 10 is provided in the upper part of the glass frame 4, capable of outputting music (BGM), voices, and sound effects. For example, when the normal game state (described later) is controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, and when the time-saving game state (described later) is controlled, music corresponding to the time-saving game state can be output. A lower speaker 10 is provided in the lower part of the glass frame 4, capable of outputting voices and sound effects. This lower speaker 10 is equipped with a speaker lamp (not shown), which illuminates during the prize-winning flash effect described later.

The light-emitting device 9 and speaker 10 are capable of issuing an abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the light-emitting device 9 can emit light using a special light-emitting pattern for abnormality notification, and the speaker 10 can output voice or warning sounds that announce the specific details of the abnormality.

The receiving tray member 5 consists of an upper receiving tray 5a and a lower receiving tray 5b. When the amount of game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are dispensed into the lower receiving tray 5b. The receiving tray member 5 is also equipped with a ball release button 11 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 5a to the lower receiving tray 5b at the end of the game, a ball dispensing button 12 for requesting game balls from a game ball dispensing device (not shown), a card return button 13 for requesting the return of a valuable medium (prepaid card, membership card) inserted into the slot of the game ball dispensing device, a balance display unit 12a for displaying the remaining balance of the valuable medium, and a ball dispensing available lamp 12b for indicating that ball dispensing is possible by operating the ball dispensing button 12.

Furthermore, the receiving tray member 5 is provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15, which can be operated by the player when an action prompting the player to operate each operating means is performed. The effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently or as a single unit.

Furthermore, vibration devices may be provided on one or both of the performance buttons 14 and the performance lever 15 to cause them to vibrate. For example, the vibration may be used as a pre-announcement effect, or it may be used to notify the player that they are transitioning to a jackpot or minor win (described later). Note that either the performance button 14 or the performance lever 15 may be provided alone, or multiple versions of either one may be provided.

Furthermore, the effective operation period for the performance lever 15 may be set simultaneously with the effective operation period for the performance button 14, or vice versa. For example, if the performance lever 15 is operated while the performance button 14 is being prompted to be operated, the system may determine that an input for the performance lever 15 has been received and execute the corresponding performance.

Furthermore, the receiving tray member 5 is equipped with a directional pad 16 that can be operated by the player. This directional pad allows for adjustment of the volume of music (BGM), voices, and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjustment of the light intensity emitted from the light-emitting device 9, mode selection (described later), and access to a menu screen for performing operations corresponding to each menu. Note that while the directional pad 16 serves as an operating device for mode selection and menu screen operations, separate, dedicated operating devices for volume and light intensity adjustment may be provided.

Furthermore, a decorative section 2a is provided at the upper end of the outer frame 2. This decorative section 2a extends further upward from the upper end of the outer frame and, for example, is shaped like a character, creating a visual impact. On the other hand, components located behind the decorative section 2a (for example, an external information display) may be difficult for some players to see. The decorative section 2a may always extend upward from the upper end of the outer frame 2, or it may be configured to change from a retracted state to an extended state when a predetermined condition is met.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained based on Figure 2. The rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards, including the main control board 100 (described later), the performance control board 200, the payout control board 300 and payout device 304, and the power supply board 400 (more precisely, these various control boards are mounted on the rear of the inner frame 3).

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is equipped with a RAM clear switch 105. The RAM clear switch 105 is used to initialize the game information that is overwritten when a game is played in the main RAM 103. For example, if the game remains in a time-saving game state until closing time, the administrator (e.g., a game store employee) can press the RAM clear switch 105 while turning on the power to clear the time-saving game information, allowing the game to start from the normal game state at opening time the next day.

Furthermore, the RAM clear switch 105 also serves as a switch for switching the setting value in the setting change state described later. Details will be explained later in the flowchart, but for example, if there are six setting values, when setting value "1" is displayed on the display unit 104 (described later), pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches from setting value "1" to setting value "2". Pressing the RAM clear switch 105 again switches from setting value "2" to setting value "3", and so on, with each subsequent press of the RAM clear switch 105 switching to setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "6", and so on. When setting value "6" is displayed on the display unit 104, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches from setting value "6" back to setting value "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may also be provided on the power supply board 400, or directly on the inner frame 3, as long as it is possible to input to the main control board 100.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used to set one of the multiple setting values described later. Specifically, by inserting a setting change key (not shown), managed by the amusement parlor staff, into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotating it 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and simultaneously pressing the RAM clear switch 105 mentioned above while turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 (turning on the power switch 400a), the machine enters a setting change state where the setting value can be set. Details of the setting change state will be described later in the flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used to check the currently set values. Specifically, when a setting change key, managed by a staff member of the amusement parlor, is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON (power switch SW400a is turned ON), the machine enters a setting confirmation state where the setting values can be checked. Details of the setting confirmation state will be described later in the flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated using a setting change key, allowing the main CPU 101 to detect three positions (states): vertical, horizontal, and diagonal. While the setting change keyhole 31 is provided on the main control board 100, its location is not limited to this. For example, the setting change keyhole 31 may be provided on the inner frame 3.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is equipped with a display unit 104. The display unit 104 displays the set value when the settings have been changed or confirmed. If the settings have not been changed or confirmed, it displays game performance information calculated using a formula such as "(Number of game balls dispensed in normal game state ÷ Number of balls out in normal game state) × 100".

The game performance information is calculated every interrupt (for example, every 4ms) when the settings are not changed or confirmed (for example, when the timer interrupt process is permitted). At predetermined display intervals (for example, every 5 seconds), the current section and the past three sections (the section before, the section before that, and the section before that) can be displayed. That is, the display switches as follows: display of the current section → predetermined time elapsed (5 seconds elapsed) → display of past section (1) → predetermined time elapsed (5 seconds elapsed) → display of past section (2) → predetermined time elapsed (5 seconds elapsed) → display of past section (3) → predetermined time elapsed (5 seconds elapsed) → display of the current section.

Next, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained based on Figure 3. The game board 6 is made of plywood or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is detachably assembled to the back side. The game board 6 has a game area 7 on which game balls can roll, and an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail member 19 are formed to guide the game balls launched from the launching device into the game area 7. Furthermore, the game area 7 includes a gate member 20 through which game balls can pass, a first starting opening 21 into which game balls can enter, a stage 17 to facilitate entry into the first starting opening 21, a second starting opening 22 into which game balls can enter, a regular prize opening 23 into which game balls can enter, a first large prize opening 24 into which game balls can enter when the later-described Big Win 1 game or Big Win 2 game is being played, a second large prize opening 32 into which game balls can enter when the later-described Small Win game is being played, an out opening 25 for discharging game balls that did not enter any of the prize openings to the outside of the game area (game ball discharge trough), a movable body 28 that moves in the vertical direction, and other features such as game nails (not shown) and windmills. In this embodiment, the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the regular prize opening 23, the first large prize opening 24, and the second large prize opening 32 may be referred to as "winning" or "ball entry," while the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 21 and the second starting opening 22 may be referred to as "starting prize entry."

The game area 7 comprises a game area 7a (a game area for so-called "left-handed play") formed to the left of the center (dotted line C) and a game area 7b (a game area for so-called "right-handed play") formed to the right of the center.

The gate member 20 is located in the right-center of the game area 7, allowing game balls to pass through when "right-handed shooting" is performed, where game balls are launched to the right side of the game area 7. It also remains open upwards at all times, always allowing game balls to pass through. When a game ball passes through the gate member 20 and is detected by the gate detection switch 20a, the "gate detection processing" described later is performed. This involves a "normal symbol hit determination processing" to determine whether or not to extend the protruding member (not shown) provided at the second start opening 22. After the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the "normal symbol variation game" is executed, deriving the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that the gate member 20 may also be located in the left-center of the game area 7.

When a regular symbol variation game is being played based on a ball passing through the gate member 20, if another game ball passes through the gate member 20, the execution of that regular symbol variation game is suspended. In addition to the regular symbol variation game currently being played, up to four games can be suspended. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a hold memory area for normal symbol variation games. This hold memory area consists of a "variation memory area" corresponding to the currently varying normal symbol variation game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the normal symbol variation game to be played after the currently varying normal symbol variation game ends, and subsequently, a "second memory area," a "third memory area," and a "fourth memory area." When the currently varying normal symbol variation game finishes, the judgment information (random value) stored in the "first memory area" is moved to the "variation memory area," the judgment information (random value) stored in the "second memory area" is moved to the "first memory area," the judgment information (random value) stored in the "third memory area" is moved to the "third memory area," the judgment information (random value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is moved to the "third memory area," and the "fourth memory area" becomes free.

The first starting port 21 is located in the center of the game area 7. When the game ball is launched to the left of the game area 7 (so-called "left-handed shooting"), the game ball can enter the port. When the game ball is launched to the right (so-called "right-handed shooting"), the game ball cannot enter the port. It is also permanently open upwards, always allowing the game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the first starting port 21 and is detected by the first starting port detection switch 21a, for example, if three game balls are dispensed as prize balls, and any of the remaining reserved memory areas are empty, a special symbol win determination process is performed. The special symbols and decorative symbols (including the fourth symbol) are then displayed in a variable manner, and after the variable time has elapsed, the result of the special symbol win determination process (special symbols and decorative symbols) is derived (confirmed and displayed). This is called the "symbol variation game."

When a symbol variation game is in progress based on a ball entering the first starting gate 21, if another game ball enters the first starting gate 21, the execution of the symbol variation game based on that ball is suspended. A maximum of four symbol variation games can be suspended, excluding the one currently in progress.

Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserved memory area for symbol variation games. This reserved memory area consists of a "variation memory area" corresponding to the currently changing symbol variation game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the symbol variation game to be played after the currently changing symbol variation game has finished, and then a "second memory area," a "third memory area," and a "fourth memory area." When the currently changing symbol variation game finishes with judgment information (random values) stored in all reserved memory areas, the judgment information (random values) stored in the "first memory area" is moved to the "variation memory area," the judgment information (random values) stored in the "second memory area" is moved to the "first memory area," the judgment information (random values) stored in the "third memory area" is moved to the "second memory area," the judgment information (random values) stored in the "fourth memory area" is moved to the "third memory area," and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty. Although the first starting opening 21 is designed as an entry point for game balls, it may also be configured as a passage area through which game balls can pass.

Furthermore, a start-up opening light-emitting device 21a is provided around the first start-up opening 21. This start-up opening light-emitting device 21a can emit light to notify the player when a game ball enters the first start-up opening 21, or, when performing the pre-announcement of reserved balls (described later), it can emit light in the same color as the reserved ball icon (or the corresponding variable icon) that is the target of the pre-announcement of reserved balls. This allows the player to recognize the color of the hidden reserved ball icon (or the corresponding variable icon) from the light emitted by the start-up opening light-emitting device 21a, even if the reserved ball icon (or the corresponding variable icon) is temporarily hidden (for example, during a super reach).

The second starting port 22 is located in the right-center of the game area 7. It allows game balls to enter when the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 7 (so-called "right-handed shooting"), but prevents game ball entry when "left-handed shooting" is performed. Furthermore, unlike the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22 is not always open upwards and, in principle, does not allow game ball entry (it is in a "closed" state). That is, the second starting port 22 has a protruding member that can project forward, and game ball entry is only possible when this protruding member is projected forward (in an "open" state).

Whether or not to allow the game ball to enter by extending the protruding member forward is possible when the normal symbol win determination process determines a normal symbol win, as shown in the opening and closing mode of "Opening and Closing of the Second Start Port" in Figure 6. When a game ball enters the second start port 22 and is detected by the second start port detection SW 22a, for example, two game balls are dispensed as prize balls, and the symbol variation game is executed.

When a symbol variation game is being played based on a ball entering the second starting port 22, if another game ball enters the second starting port 22, the execution of the symbol variation game based on that ball is not suspended. In other words, in the main RAM 103, the memory area related to balls entering the second starting port 22 is limited to the "variation memory area" corresponding to the currently changing symbol variation game.

Furthermore, while the memory area for ball entry into the second starting opening 22 is described as providing only the "variable memory area," it may be configured similarly to the memory area for ball entry into the first starting opening 21 described above. Also, while a protruding member movable in the front-rear direction is used as the second starting opening 22, a so-called "electric tulip" with movable wings may also be used. Additionally, while the second starting opening 22 is described as a ball entry opening, it may also be configured as a passage area through which the game ball can pass.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the sequence of events—where game balls enter the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22, a special symbol win determination process is performed, the special symbol and decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and after the variable time has elapsed, the determination result of the special symbol win determination process (special symbol and decorative symbol) is derived (confirmed display)—may be referred to as a "symbol variation game," or simply as a "one-variation game." The period during which the "symbol variation game" is executed may also be referred to as "variation display."

Furthermore, when one game ball enters the first starting port 21, the first special symbol display 27a and the image display device 26 execute a "symbol variation game" based on the entry of one game ball. When one game ball enters the second starting port 22, the second special symbol display 27b and the image display device 26 execute a "symbol variation game" based on the entry of one game ball. Therefore, "symbol variation game" refers to the general term for the games played by the first special symbol display 27a and the image display device 26, and the general term for the games played by the second special symbol display 27b and the image display device 26.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, deriving the result of the special symbol hit detection process (special symbols and decorative symbols) after the variation time in the symbol variation game has elapsed is referred to as "confirmation display" (of the special symbols and decorative symbols). "Confirmation display" means that the special symbols and decorative symbols have completely stopped. On the other hand, in the symbol variation game, temporarily stopping the decorative symbols (excluding the fourth symbol in this case) before the variation time has elapsed is referred to as "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbols. Examples of "temporary stop display" include the left and right decorative symbols when it is a "reach" as described later, and the "shaking variation display" before "confirmation display". The "fluctuating display" before the "confirmation display" refers to the fluctuation display that occurs at the branching point where, for example, the decorative symbols might "temporarily stop" on a number like "767" and then "confirm" on "767," or they might "temporarily stop" on a losing "767" and then, after a reversal sequence leads to "777," "confirm" on "777." Note that the fourth symbol is designed to "confirm" without any "temporarily stopping" display.

The regular prize slots 23 are located in the lower left and lower right of the game area 7, for a total of four slots. The three regular prize slots 23 in the lower left allow game balls to enter when "left-handed shooting" is performed (but not when "right-handed shooting"), while the one regular prize slot 23 in the lower right allows game balls to enter when so-called "right-handed shooting" is performed (but not when "left-handed shooting"). In addition, like the first start slot 21, the regular prize slots 23 are always open upwards, allowing game balls to enter at all times. When a game ball enters a regular prize slot 23 and is detected by the regular prize slot detection SW 23a, for example, eight game balls are dispensed as prize balls. Note that the arrangement of the regular prize slots 23 can be changed arbitrarily, and the number can also be less than four. Furthermore, the number of prize balls awarded may differ between the three regular prize slots 23 in the lower left and the single regular prize slot 23 in the lower right.

The first large prize slot 24 is located in the lower right part of the game area 7, and game balls can enter when "right-handed shooting" is performed (they cannot enter when "left-handed shooting" is performed). The first large prize slot 24 has an opening and closing door, and when a special symbol win is determined in the special symbol win determination process, the jackpot game 1 is executed, the opening and closing door tilts forward, and game balls enter. Then, when game balls enter the first large prize slot 24 and are detected by the first large prize slot detection SW 24a, for example, "15" game balls are dispensed as prize balls.

In a single jackpot game, the opening/closing door of the first large prize entry point 24 opens (tilts forward) for the number of rounds (R) shown in Figure 6. For each round, the door remains open (tilts forward) for 29.5 seconds (S = seconds). If 10 game balls are detected by the first large prize entry point detection switch 24a before 29.5 seconds have elapsed, the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round, even before 29.5 seconds have passed. This process is repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5 seconds have elapsed before 10 game balls are detected by the first large prize entry point detection switch 24a (the so-called "attacker full open"), the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round. In this case, the game ends before reaching the specified number of 10 balls per round, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, a tilting opening/closing door is used as the first large prize winning opening 24. However, a so-called "electric tulip" mechanism or a "shutter member" that moves back and forth in the front-to-back direction may also be used.

The second large prize slot 32 is located in the lower right part of the game area 7, and game balls can enter when "right-handed shooting" is performed (they cannot enter when "left-handed shooting" is performed). In addition, a specific area (the so-called "V prize slot") into which game balls can enter is provided inside the second large prize slot 32. When a game ball enters the specific area, the second big win game is executed. Specifically, when a minor win is determined in the special symbol win determination process, the minor win game is executed, and the opening and closing door tilts forward to allow the game ball to enter. Furthermore, the cover member of the specific area is opened to allow the game ball to enter the specific area. When a game ball enters the specific area while the minor win game is being executed (for example, in the first round), the minor win game ends and the second big win game is executed. In other words, during a two-round jackpot game, the opening and closing door of the first jackpot 24 remains open (tilts forward) for the number of rounds shown in Figure 6. However, since the first round is a minor jackpot game, the second jackpot 32 opens, and the first jackpot 24 opens from the second round onward.

Furthermore, a cover member (not shown) is provided in a specific area, and when a minor win game is being played, the cover member is in an open state. In this embodiment, special symbols F and G are provided as special symbols that trigger the minor win game. When these special symbols are displayed, the cover member is in an open state, allowing the game ball to enter the specific area. In other words, during a minor win game, as long as the player follows the instructions and "shoots to the right," it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific area and trigger a major win game.

The image display device 26 has a display area covering almost the entire surface and is positioned above the stage 17. It is capable of displaying the symbol variation game and performance images within its display area. Specifically, based on the entry of a game ball into either the first or second start port 21 and the determination of a special symbol win, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are varied (vertically scrolled) within the variation display area. Note that whether the game ball enters the first or second start port 22, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are varied (vertically scrolled) within the variation display area (although the special symbol display units differ, the decorative symbols used in the image display device 26 are the same).

Then, during the variation time, a visual effect image is displayed. Once the variation time has elapsed, if it is a special win (or minor win), the system indicates that it is a special win (or minor win) by, for example, stopping each decorative symbol with a "7" and displaying the confirmed combination of decorative symbols, "777". On the other hand, if it is a special loss, the system indicates that it is a special loss by, for example, displaying the confirmed combination of decorative symbols, "765".

Furthermore, separate from each decorative symbol, a fourth symbol 26d (the "fourth" symbol following the left decorative symbol 26a, middle decorative symbol 26b, and right decorative symbol 26c mentioned above) can be displayed in the lower right of the display area, and it is possible to display the variable and confirmed symbols in synchronization with each decorative symbol. In addition, the image display device 26 can display a first start slot reserved count image 26e that displays the number of reserved symbols in the first start slot 21 as "0" to "4", and a first start slot first reserved ball image display area 26g, first start slot second reserved ball image display area 26h, first start slot third reserved ball image display area 26i, and first start slot fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (in Figure 3, simply shown as "g", "h", "i", and "j") that display the number of reserved symbols in the first start slot 21 using reserved ball images. Furthermore, the display area 26o (simply shown as "o" in Figure 3), which displays an icon image corresponding to the currently running symbol variation game, can be displayed.

The number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port reserved ball count image 26e is synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. For example, if "4" is displayed in the first start port reserved ball count image 26e, then "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

The number of reserved balls displayed as the reserved ball count image 26e in the first starting port may be referred to as "numbered reserved balls" below. Furthermore, the reserved ball images displayed in the first reserved ball image display area 26g, the second reserved ball image display area 26h, the third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the fourth reserved ball image display area 26j in the first starting port may be referred to as "reserved icons" below. Also, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be referred to as "the variable icon" below. Finally, the variable icon and reserved icon may be collectively referred to simply as "icons."

Furthermore, while the variable icon display area 26o, the first reserved ball image display area 26g, the second reserved ball image display area 26h, the third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are shown on the image display device 26, the system is not limited to this. They may also be displayed on LEDs, lamps, or on a separate display device (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal display").

The left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, the right decorative symbol 26c, and the fourth symbol 26d are capable of displaying symbol images from "1" to "8". If the special symbol win detection process determines a special symbol win, one of the following symbol combinations can be displayed, depending on the special symbol: "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", or "888". If the special symbol win detection process determines a minor win, one of the following symbol combinations can be displayed: "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", or "888". There may also be a symbol combination specifically for minor wins (e.g., "999").

On the other hand, if the special symbol win/loss determination process results in a special symbol miss, it is possible to display symbol combinations other than those mentioned above. If it is a miss, and a special symbol variation pattern accompanied by a "reach" is determined (as described later), a symbol combination such as "767" will be displayed. If a special symbol variation pattern without a "reach" is determined, a symbol combination such as "765" will be displayed.

The combination of symbols displayed as confirmed by the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c is the same as the combination of symbols displayed as confirmed by the fourth symbol 26d. For example, if "777" is confirmed by the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c, then "777" will also be confirmed by the fourth symbol 26d. Similarly, if "767" is confirmed by the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c, then "767" will also be confirmed by the fourth symbol 26d.

"Reach" refers to a state where the left decorative symbol 26a and the right decorative symbol 26c display the same number (temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 26b is in a variable state (the symbols that are temporarily stopped and the symbols that are variable are not limited to these). In this embodiment, if the result of the "special symbol win determination process" is a special symbol win, the game is always configured to go through a "reach" state. Therefore, it can be said that this is a state in which the player can expect a winning game.

Furthermore, the fourth symbol 26d does not necessarily have to be a combination of the symbols described above. It may simply display a single-digit number, a two-digit number, a symbol or character, or the type of symbol may be distinguished by differences in the emitted light color.

The symbol display device 27 is located outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is a different area from the game area 7 of the game board 6. The symbol display device 27 is equipped with a first special symbol display 27a, which is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the first start opening 21, and a second special symbol display 27b, which executes a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the second start opening 22. The first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are composed of 7-segment displays. In the symbol variation game, the special symbols flash with a "-" (horizontal bar symbol) from the start of the variation, and when it is time to derive the judgment result of the special symbol hit judgment process, if it is a miss, the "-" (horizontal bar symbol) lights up (confirmation display), and if it is a special symbol hit, for example, a "7" lights up (confirmation display). In other words, "special patterns" refer to patterns that are displayed and controlled by the main control board 100.

In this embodiment, the "special pattern," as well as the aforementioned left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, right decorative pattern 26c, and fourth pattern 26d, may be simply referred to as "patterns" or "identification information." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, and right decorative pattern 26c, managed by the performance control board 200, may be simply referred to as "decorative patterns." Additionally, the left decorative pattern 26a, middle decorative pattern 26b, right decorative pattern 26c, and fourth pattern 26d, managed by the performance control board 200, may be collectively referred to as "sub-patterns."

The symbol display device 27 is equipped with a first special symbol hold indicator 27c, which is controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of hold symbols in the symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 21.

The first special symbol hold indicator 27c consists of two dot LED indicators, and can display the number of holds by "off," "on," or "flashing." For example, if the number of holds is "0," both dot LED indicators are "off." If the number of holds is "1," one indicator is "on" and the other is "off." If the number of holds is "2," both indicators are "on." If the number of holds is "3," one indicator is "on" and the other is "flashing." If the number of holds is "4," both indicators are "flashing."

The first special symbol hold indicator 27c synchronizes, in principle, the number of hold balls displayed as the first start port hold count image 26e and the number of hold balls displayed in the first start port first hold ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth hold ball image display area 26j (except in cases of command errors, etc.). For example, if both the first special symbol hold indicator 27c are "flashing" (indicating 4 hold balls), then "4" will be displayed as the first start port hold count image 26e, and "4" hold ball images will be displayed in the first start port first hold ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth hold ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c may be referred to as the "main hold indicator."

The first special symbol hold indicator 27c is configured with two dot LED indicators, but is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided, and the display may be shown on the liquid crystal display device.

Furthermore, the symbol display device 27 is equipped with a normal symbol display unit 27e, which is controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a game ball through the gate member 20. The normal symbol display unit 27e consists of two dot LED displays. In the normal symbol variation game, from the start of the variation, it repeatedly alternates between lighting one LED and turning the other off, and turning one LED off and lighting the other. When it is time to derive the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, if the normal symbol is a miss, it displays a confirmation by lighting one LED and turning the other off; if the normal symbol is a hit, it displays a confirmation by turning one LED off and lighting the other.

Furthermore, the symbol display device 27 is equipped with a regular symbol hold indicator 27f, which is controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols in the regular symbol variation game based on the number of game balls passing through the gate member 20. The regular symbol hold indicator 27f, like the first special symbol hold indicator 27c, is composed of two dot LED indicators, and the display method for the number of reserved symbols is also the same; therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted.

Furthermore, the symbol display device 27 is equipped with a round indicator 27g that displays the "number of rounds (see Figure 6)" and is controlled by the main control board 100. The round indicator 27g consists of two dot LED indicators, one for 4 rounds and one for 10 rounds. For example, if a special symbol A results in a win, the 4-round LED indicator lights up while the others turn off. If a win occurs with special symbol D, the 10-round LED indicator lights up while the others turn off.

The game board 6 is equipped with multiple board lighting devices 29 (for example, full-color LEDs). When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, these devices illuminate in a predetermined light-emitting pattern to enhance the decorative appearance of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, as shown by reference numeral 29 in Figure 3, the board lighting devices 29 can illuminate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6. Furthermore, to highlight the display content of the image display device 26, all board lighting devices 29 can be turned off. The predetermined light-emitting pattern consists of multiple patterns that define the light-emitting speed, light-emitting color, and which LEDs are illuminated and which are not.

To the right of the image display device 26, a first special symbol sub-hold indicator 29a and a right-hand play indicator 29c are provided, as a form of the panel lighting device 29. The first special symbol sub-hold indicator 29a is controlled by the performance control board 200 and consists of two dot LED indicators, capable of displaying the number of holds by "off," "on," or "flashing." For example, if the number of holds is "0," both dot LED indicators are "off"; if the number of holds is "1," one is "on" and the other is "off"; if the number of holds is "2," both are "on"; if the number of holds is "3," one is "on" and the other is "flashing"; and if the number of holds is "4," both are "flashing."

The first special symbol sub-reserve indicator 29a synchronizes, in principle, the number of reserves displayed as the first start port reserve count image 26e with the number of reserves displayed in the first start port first reserve ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserve ball image display area 26j (except in cases of command errors, etc.). For example, if both the first special symbol sub-reserve indicator 29a are "flashing" (indicating 4 reserves), then "4" will be displayed as the first start port reserve count image 26e, and "4" reserve ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserve ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserve ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol sub-reserve indicator 29a may be referred to as the "sub-reserve indicator."

The first special symbol sub-hold indicator 29a is configured with two dot LED indicators, but this is not limited to that configuration. For example, it may be displayed on a separate display device from the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-LCD").

The right-hand shooting indicator 29c is controlled by the performance control board 200. For example, it lights up based on the reception of an opening command during a jackpot or minor win game, or based on the reception of a game state specification command (time reduction). This prompts the player to shoot to the right. Conversely, it remains off during normal gameplay (turned off based on the reception of a game state specification command (normal)), prompting the player to shoot to the left. While the right-hand shooting indicator 29c is off to prompt the player to shoot to the left, a left-hand shooting indicator could also be provided, and illuminating this indicator could also prompt the player to shoot to the left.

Next, we will explain the internal configuration (block diagram of the control system) of the pachinko game machine 1 based on Figure 4. Note that explanations of the configuration of the game board 6 in Figure 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a main control board 100, a performance control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 mounted on the rear side of the central frame 3. The main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness (not shown) to enable one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. The main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness (not shown) to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, the payout control board 300 is connected to the performance control board 200 to enable one-way communication. The power supply board 400 receives external power via a power plug (not shown) and is connected to supply the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, performance control board 200, or payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 is connected via harnesses and relay boards to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses and relay boards to enable display control to various indicators and drive control to various solenoids. Similarly, the performance control board 200 is connected via harnesses and relay boards to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses and relay boards to enable display control to various indicators.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that executes control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores the control program necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main RAM 103 that allows reading and writing necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. Although not shown in the diagram, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that provides interrupt signals to the main CPU 101, and a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range. The control processing related to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

The main RAM 103 is provided with storage areas (not shown) for managing various types of information. Examples include a setting value storage area for storing setting value information, a special symbol state flag storage area for storing the state of special symbols, a game state storage area for storing the game state, a jackpot state storage area for storing the state during a jackpot game, a minor win state storage area for storing the state during a minor win game, a normal symbol state flag storage area for storing the state of normal symbols, and a normal symbol win state storage area for storing the state during a normal symbol win game.

The main RAM 103 is equipped with counters (not shown) for managing various types of information (time and count). Examples include a time-saving game count counter for counting (storing) the number of times the symbol variation game has been played during the time-saving game state, a time management counter for managing various time periods (e.g., opening time), and a round count counter for managing the number of rounds in the first and second jackpot games.

The gate detection switch 20a is located inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball has passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the gate detection switch 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the passage of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), upon receiving the detected information, controls the system to immediately execute the normal symbol variation game if the normal symbol hold indicator 27f is not currently running the normal symbol variation game and no judgment information (random values) is stored in any of the variation memory areas for normal symbols (from the relevant memory area to the fourth memory area). For example, if judgment information (random values) is stored up to the third memory area, the system controls the system to postpone the execution of the normal symbol variation game. If judgment information (random values) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the system controls the system not to postpone the execution of the normal symbol variation game.

The first start port detection switch 21a is located inside the prize entry point of the first start port 21 of the game board 6, and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the first start port 21. In other words, the first start port detection switch 21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then executes a process to dispense three game balls to the payout control board 300 as prize balls for the entry of a game ball into the first start port 21.

Furthermore, when input is received from the first start port detection SW21a, the main control board 100 controls the system to immediately execute the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display 27a if neither the first special symbol display 27a nor the second special symbol display 27b is currently running the symbol variation game, and if no judgment information (random values) is stored in any of the variation memory areas (from the first start port) to the fourth memory area for the special symbols (first start port). For example, if judgment information (random values) is stored up to the third memory area, the system controls the system to postpone the execution of the symbol variation game. If judgment information (random values) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the system controls the system not to postpone the execution of the symbol variation game.

The second start port detection switch 22a is located inside the prize entry point of the second start port 22 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the second start port 22. In other words, the second start port detection switch 22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then executes a process to dispense two game balls to the payout control board 300 as prize balls for the entry of game balls into the second start port 22.

Furthermore, when input is received from the second start port detection SW22a, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) immediately controls the second special symbol display 27b to execute the symbol variation game if neither the first special symbol display 27a nor the second special symbol display 27b is currently running the symbol variation game.

The second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b is located behind the second start port 22 and is a solenoid that causes the protruding member provided on the second start port 22 to open and close. In other words, the second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), when it determines a normal symbol win in the normal symbol win detection process, drives and controls the second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b to open and close it in the manner shown in "Opening and Closing of the Second Start Port" in Figure 6.

The normal prize entry slot detection switch 23a is located inside the normal prize entry slot 23 of the game board 6 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the normal prize entry slot 23. In other words, the normal prize entry slot detection switch 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc., and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then executes a process to dispense 8 game balls to the payout control board 300 as prize balls for the entry of a game ball into the normal prize entry slot 23.

The first large prize slot detection switch 24a is located inside the prize slot 24 of the first large prize slot and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the first large prize slot 24. In other words, the first large prize slot detection switch 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then executes a process to dispense 15 game balls to the payout control board 300 as prize balls for the game ball entering the first large prize slot 24. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) also sends a large prize slot entry designation command to the performance control board 200, indicating that a game ball has entered the first large prize slot 24. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the status of the game balls entering the first large prize slot 24.

The first large prize opening/closing solenoid 24b is located behind or to the side of the first large prize opening 24 and is a solenoid that causes the opening/closing door of the first large prize opening 24 to open and close. In other words, the first large prize opening/closing solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the first large prize opening/closing solenoid 24b to open and close the opening/closing door over the number of rounds shown in Figure 6 during one jackpot game.

The second large prize slot detection switch 32a is located inside the prize slot of the second large prize slot 32 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the second large prize slot 32. In other words, the second large prize slot detection switch 32a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then processes the payout control board 300 to dispense "15" game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the second large prize slot 32. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) also sends a large prize slot entry designation command to the performance control board 200, indicating that a game ball has entered the second large prize slot 32. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the status of the game balls entering the second large prize slot 32.

The second large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 32b is located behind the second large prize slot 32 and is a solenoid that causes the opening/closing door of the second large prize slot 32 to open and close. In other words, the second large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 32b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the second large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 32b when it determines a minor win in the special symbol win detection process.

The specific area detection switch 32c is located in a specific area inside the second large prize pocket 32 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the specific area of the second large prize pocket 32. In other words, the specific area detection switch 32c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, then processes the payout control board 300 to dispense 15 game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the specific area. Furthermore, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), having received the detected information, processes the termination of the minor prize game and transition to the major prize game 2. Furthermore, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits a specific area entry designation command to the performance control board 200, indicating that a game ball has entered a specific area of the second large prize winning slot 32. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the status of the game ball's entry into the specific area of the second large prize winning slot 32.

The specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d is located behind the specific area and is a solenoid that causes the lid member located in the specific area to open and close. In other words, the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d to open and close the lid member when it determines a minor win in the special symbol win detection process. The opening and closing times of the lid member can be set to any desired time.

The out detection switch 25a is located downstream of the flow path that collects game balls that enter the first start opening 21 and are detected by the first start opening detection switch 21a, game balls that enter the second start opening 22 and are detected by the second start opening detection switch 22a, game balls that enter the normal prize opening 23 and are detected by the normal prize opening detection switch 23a, game balls that enter the first large prize opening 24 and are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 24a, game balls that enter the second large prize opening 32 and are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 32a, and game balls that enter the out opening 25.

The out detection switch 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc. When a game ball enters the machine, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to determine the number of out balls. Alternatively, an out detection switch may be provided at the out port 25, and the game balls detected by this switch may be counted as out balls.

The first special symbol display unit 27a is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is controlled by the main control board 100. It is a display unit for executing a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 21. In other words, the first special symbol display unit 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) displays and controls the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display unit 27a when the execution conditions for the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display unit 27a are met. The execution conditions for the symbol variation game on the first special symbol display unit 27a are met when a positive determination is made in the process of step S105-2-2 in the "Special Symbol Variation Start Processing" (see Figure 19) described later.

The second special symbol indicator 27b is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is controlled by the main control board 100. It is a display for executing a symbol variation game based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 22. In other words, the second special symbol indicator 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) displays and controls the symbol variation game on the second special symbol indicator 27b when the execution conditions for the symbol variation game on the second special symbol indicator 27b are met. The execution conditions for the symbol variation game on the second special symbol indicator 27b are met when a positive determination is made in step S105-2-1 of the "Special Symbol Variation Start Processing" (see Figure 19).

The first special symbol hold indicator 27c is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is controlled by the main control board 100. It displays the number of hold symbols in a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the first start port 21. Specifically, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board. When the main control board 100 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the first start port detection SW 21a, it controls the display of the first special symbol hold indicator 27c (changing from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of hold symbols (4) has not been reached. Conversely, when the symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the currently changing first start port 21 ends, the display of the first special symbol hold indicator 27c is controlled (changing from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The standard symbol display unit 27e is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is a display unit for executing a standard symbol variation game, which is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100. In other words, the standard symbol display unit 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) displays and controls the standard symbol variation game on the standard symbol display unit 27e when the execution conditions for the standard symbol variation game on the standard symbol display unit 27e are met.

The standard symbol hold indicator 27f is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is controlled by the main control board 100. It displays the number of hold balls in a standard symbol variation game based on the number of game balls that have passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the standard symbol hold indicator 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board. When the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) receives information that game balls have been detected from the gate detection SW 20a, it controls the display of the standard symbol hold indicator 27f (changing from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of hold balls (4) has not been reached. Conversely, when the currently running standard symbol variation game ends, the display of the standard symbol hold indicator 27f is controlled (changing from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The round indicator 27g is installed on the symbol display device 27 and is controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of rounds. Specifically, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board. For example, when a symbol variation game determined to be a special symbol win by the special symbol win determination process ends, and a special symbol indicating a win (e.g., "7") is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 27a, the corresponding round number LED indicator is controlled to light up. While the first or second jackpot game is in progress, the round indicator 27g remains lit, and when the first or second jackpot game ends, the round indicator 27g is turned off.

The magnetic sensors 27h are installed in multiple locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting magnetism. In other words, the magnetic sensors 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. For example, if an abnormal magnetic field exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect the abnormal magnetic field. Upon detecting an abnormal magnetic field, information indicating the detection of the abnormal magnetic field (magnetic anomaly error specification command) is transmitted to the performance control board 200. This enables notification of the detection of an abnormal magnetic field.

The radio wave sensors 27i are installed in multiple locations on the game board 6 and are sensors for detecting radio waves. In other words, the radio wave sensors 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. For example, if an abnormal radio wave exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect the abnormal radio wave. Upon detecting an abnormal radio wave, information indicating the detection of an abnormal radio wave (an error designation command for radio wave abnormality) is transmitted to the performance control board 200. This enables notification of the detection of an abnormal radio wave.

The performance control board 200 is provided with a performance control unit 200a, which includes a sub-CPU 201 that executes performance control processing, a sub-ROM 202 that stores the control program necessary for the performance control processing, and a sub-RAM 203 that is capable of reading and writing necessary for the performance control processing. Furthermore, an image/sound control unit 200b is provided, which is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like to enable bidirectional communication. The image/sound control unit 200b includes an image/sound CPU 204 that executes image/sound control processing, a sound ROM 205 that stores sound data, a CGROM 206 that stores image data, and a VRAM 207 with a frame buffer that stores image generation data, etc. Furthermore, a light-emitting drive control unit 200c is provided, which is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like to enable bidirectional communication. This light-emitting drive control unit 200c includes a light-emitting drive CPU 208 that executes light-emitting control processing and drive control processing, a light-emitting drive ROM 209 that stores the control programs necessary for the light-emitting control processing and drive control processing, and a light-emitting drive RAM 210 that allows for the necessary reading and writing during the light-emitting control processing and drive control processing.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 200a is connected to accept operation information from the performance button detection SW14a, the performance lever detection SW15a, and the directional key detection SW16a.

The performance button detection switch 14a is located on the performance button 14 and is a switch that detects when the performance button 14 is pressed by the player while the performance button 14 is within its effective operation time. In other words, the performance button detection switch 14a and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness or relay board, and information indicating that the performance button 14 has been pressed is input to the performance control board 200. The performance control board 200, having received this information, then controls the performance corresponding to the press of the performance button 14 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol variation game, the performance button 14 has a set effective operation time (also called the effective operation period), and the performance button detection switch 14a only detects presses that occur during this set effective operation time.

The performance lever detection switch 15a is located on the performance lever 15 and is a switch that detects when the performance lever 15 is operated by the player while it is within the effective operation time. In other words, the performance lever detection switch 15a and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness or relay board, and information indicating that the performance lever 15 has been operated is input to the performance control board 200. The performance control board 200, having received this information, then controls the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance lever 15 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol variation game, the performance lever 15 has a predetermined effective operation time, and the performance lever detection switch 15a only detects operations performed during this set effective operation time.

The directional pad detection switch 16a is located on the directional pad button 16 and is used to detect when the directional pad button 16 is pressed by the player. In other words, the directional pad detection switch 16a and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness or relay board, and information indicating that the directional pad button 16 has been operated is input to the performance control board 200.

As described above, the operation of the directional pad buttons 16 allows for adjustment of the light intensity emitted from the light-emitting device 9, the light intensity emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10. Specifically, pressing the up button on the directional pad buttons 16 increases the light intensity (in steps), pressing the down button on the directional pad buttons 16 decreases the light intensity (in steps), pressing the right button on the directional pad buttons 16 increases the volume (in steps), and pressing the left button on the directional pad buttons 16 decreases the volume (in steps).

The light intensity may be set to three levels: "strong," "medium," and "weak," or it may be further subdivided into five levels. Similarly, the volume may be set to three levels: "high," "medium," and "low," or it may be further subdivided into five levels. Furthermore, the image display device 26 may display a level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment for the light intensity and volume, and the speaker 10 may emit adjustment sounds corresponding to the levels. For example, if the volume adjustment level is configured in five stages, the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume level 1 may be "Do♪," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume level 2 may be "Re♪," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume level 3 may be "Mi♪," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume level 4 may be "Fa♪," and the adjustment sound corresponding to the highest volume level 5 may be "So♪." The adjustment sounds may also be output at volume values corresponding to the volume levels. For example, the output volume value for "Re♪" may be higher than that for "Do♪."

The level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that matches the light intensity or volume level, or it may be displayed in a constant manner regardless of the light intensity or volume level. Specifically, a display manner that matches the light intensity or volume level would envision, for example, displaying a larger level gauge image (display area) for volume level 2 (where the volume value is higher than volume level 1) than for volume level 1. On the other hand, a constant display manner regardless of the light intensity or volume level would envision displaying the level gauge image in a manner that remains unchanged in size (display area) for both volume level 1 and volume level 2.

Furthermore, the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume level could be set to emit a single sound, such as "beep," at every level, with the volume value varying for each level. Specifically, it is envisioned that when the volume level is 1, a "beep" sound would be emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a "beep" sound would be emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 2 (a volume value higher than volume level 1).

In this embodiment, light intensity and volume adjustments are possible when the symbol variation game is not in progress. However, they may also be possible when the symbol variation game is in progress. In this case, it is preferable to adjust the level gauge image without displaying it and without emitting an adjustment sound, or to display it in a small size and output an adjustment sound at a low volume. This prevents the visual and sound effects corresponding to the symbol variation game from being obstructed by the level gauge image and adjustment sound.

Furthermore, it may be possible to adjust the light intensity and volume during the execution of the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the minor jackpot game. In this case, the display control of the level gauge image and the output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same way as when the light intensity and volume are adjusted when the symbol variation game is not in progress, or the display control of the level gauge image and the output control of the adjustment sound may be performed in the same way as when the light intensity and volume are adjusted when the symbol variation game is in progress.

Furthermore, while the level gauge image is displayed on the image display device 26 as described above, if another display device is provided in addition to the image display device 26, the image may be displayed on that other display device. This would prevent the content displayed on the image display device 26 from interfering with the display of the level gauge image. Additionally, when the light intensity is adjusted, the level gauge image may be displayed, but the adjustment sound may not be output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the directional pad buttons 16 are operated during the effective operation time for the "dialogue announcement," "cut-in announcement," or "super reach judgment" described later, the corresponding effects will not be executed. For example, even if the directional pad buttons 16 are operated during the effective operation time for the "dialogue announcement," the "dialogue announcement" will not be executed. In other words, the directional pad buttons 16 are a device used exclusively for volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, menu operation, mode selection, etc.

The image/sound control unit 200b is connected to an image display device 26, allowing it to display image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b. Furthermore, the image/sound control unit 200b is connected to a speaker 10, allowing it to output sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b.

Speaker 10 is capable of outputting music (BGM), voices, and sound effects. For example, if information indicating a closed state is not received from the frame open detection SW3a (described later), it outputs a notification sound indicating that the inner frame 3 is open. In other words, speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness or relay board, and the aforementioned sounds are output from speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

Furthermore, the light-emitting device 9, the start port light-emitting device 21a, and the panel lighting device 29 are connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and the light emission can be controlled by the light-emitting drive control unit 200c. Additionally, the panel drive device 30 is connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via this panel drive device 30.

The movable body 28 is installed on the game board 6 and is capable of actions such as "dropping," "swinging," and "rotating." Performing these actions suggests the possibility of a winning game being awarded.

Furthermore, upon receiving a power-related subcommand, the movable body 28 performs an initial operation in front of the display area of the image display device 26 to confirm that the aforementioned operations such as "dropping," "swinging," and "rotating" are performed correctly. Because this initial operation involves the movable body 28 moving to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, the display content shown in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period due to the movable body 28. However, even if the display content shown in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other components (e.g., the start port light-emitting device 21a, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c, the panel lighting device 29, etc.) will not become difficult to see due to the initial operation of the movable body 28.

Although not shown in the diagram, the system also includes an interrupt controller circuit that provides interrupt signals to the sub-CPU 201, and a hardware random number generator that generates random numbers within a certain range.

The payout control board 300 includes a payout CPU 301 that executes payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 that stores the control program necessary for the payout control processing, and a payout RAM 303 that allows reading and writing necessary for the payout control processing. Furthermore, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness, and by controlling the payout device 304, game balls are dispensed into the upper tray 5a.

Specifically, if the main control board 100 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the first start gate detection SW21a, for example, a payout command signal is sent from the main control board 100 to the payout control board 300 to dispense three prize balls. Upon receiving this signal, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to dispense the three prize balls into the upper tray 5a. Once the dispensing of the three prize balls is complete, a payout completion signal is sent from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, completing the dispensing of game balls in response to the information received from the first start gate detection SW21a.

Furthermore, the payout control board 300 is connected to the launch handle 8 via a harness or the like. When the player touches the aforementioned handle touch sensor on the launch handle 8, information indicating that the launch handle 8 is being held is input. The amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 is input based on the amount of the launch volume (not shown) on the launch handle 8.

Furthermore, the payout control board 300 is connected to a launching device 305 via a harness, etc., and by controlling the launching device 305, game balls are launched into the game area 7. Specifically, when the payout control board 300 receives input that the player is gripping the launching handle 8 and the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8, it controls the launching device 305 with a launching intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8, and launches the game balls.

Furthermore, the payout control board 300 is connected via the ball dispensing unit, etc., to receive input signals from the ball dispensing button 12 shown in Figure 1. When the ball dispensing button 12 is operated by a player, the payout control board 300 controls the dispensing device 304 to dispense a number of game balls corresponding to one operation of the ball dispensing button 12 (for example, 125 balls) into the upper tray 5a.

The frame open detection switch 3a is located on the inner frame 3 and can detect "open" states, such as when the glass frame 4 is open, when both the glass frame 4 and the inner frame 3 are open, or when only the inner frame 3 is open, as well as the "closed" state, when both the glass frame 4 and the inner frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection switch 3a and the dispensing control board 300 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc. When the "closed" state is detected, information indicating a closed state is input to the dispensing control board 300. On the other hand, when the "open" state is detected, the information indicating a closed state is not input to the dispensing control board 300, and this lack of input allows the dispensing control board 300 (dispensing CPU 301) to detect that the "open" state is present. The dispensing control board 300 (dispensing CPU 301) can also transmit information detected as "closed" or "open" (frame open error specification command) to the performance control board 200.

A passage is formed between the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b to guide game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b, and a full-tray detection switch 300a is provided in this passage. If the game balls guided to the lower tray 5b are not discharged (outside the game machine) but stored there, the game balls will remain in the passage, and when a predetermined amount remains, the full-tray detection switch 300a turns ON. This allows detection that the lower tray 5b is also full of game balls. When the full-tray detection switch 300a turns ON, the payout CPU 301 stops the payout of game balls by the payout device 304 and transmits information that the full-tray detection switch 300a is ON to the performance control board 200. This allows the performance control board 200 to issue a notification prompting the discharge of game balls stored in the lower tray 5b.

The power supply board 400 is connected to the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300 via harnesses and the like. It receives external power via a power plug (not shown) and supplies this external power to each of the three boards. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is equipped with a conversion circuit that converts external power (100 volts AC) to 24 volts DC.

Next, the special symbol win determination table and the normal symbol win determination table will be explained using Figure 5. The special symbol win determination table (for the first start gate) in Figure 5 (A-1) and the special symbol win determination table (for the second start gate) in Figure 5 (A-2) are stored in the main ROM 102. In this embodiment, six setting values can be set, and Figures 5 (A-1) and (A-2) show examples of special symbol win determination tables for setting value 1; other setting values are not described. For example, if the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol win determination table for setting value 1 to perform the special symbol win determination process. If the setting value is set to 6, it refers to the special symbol win determination table for setting value 6 (not shown) to perform the special symbol win determination process. Note that the setting value is not limited to "6" levels; it can be any value. For example, it could be "4" levels or "2" levels.

Furthermore, the machine may not have any setting values, and may only have the special symbol win determination table shown in Figures 5(A-1) and (A-2) (it may be considered a machine without settings). Alternatively, it may have setting values, but only have the special symbol win determination table shown in Figures 5(A-1) and (A-2). In other words, it is acceptable to have only one setting value, and to use the same main control board processing content as a gaming machine with multiple setting value levels, as shown in Figure 10. Also, even if only one setting value is provided, it is acceptable to perform the setting value change processing shown in Figure 11 and the setting value confirmation processing shown in Figure 12. In this way, processing can be standardized between a gaming machine with multiple setting value levels (a machine with settings) and a gaming machine with only one setting value level (essentially a machine without settings), thus reducing the workload for developers. Also, when only one setting value level is provided, it is acceptable to use the same main control board 100 as a gaming machine with multiple setting value levels (the hardware can also be standardized). This approach allows for the standardization of components, thus reducing costs.

In the special symbol win determination table (for the first start gate) shown in Figure 5 (A-1), the probability of a special symbol win being determined in the special symbol win determination process is "1/319" and the probability of a special symbol loss is "318/319" when the game state is normal game state and when the game state is shortened time game state. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, a ball entering the first start gate 21 will never be determined as a minor win.

In the special symbol win determination table (for the second start gate) shown in Figure 5 (A-2), when the game state is in the time-saving game state, the probability of determining a special symbol win in the special symbol win determination process is "1/319", and the probability of determining a special symbol miss is "318/319". Furthermore, the probability of determining a minor win is "1/1".

Furthermore, at the first starting port 21, the minor win detection process is executed, but it may be configured so that a minor win is never detected, or the minor win detection process itself may not be executed. Also, at the second starting port 22, a minor win is always detected, but it may be detected as a "miss" during the minor win detection process. For example, a minor win may be detected with a probability of "1/1.01".

Furthermore, in the special symbol win determination table for setting value "6" (not shown in the diagram), the probability of a special symbol win being determined in the special symbol win determination process is "1/280" and the probability of a loss is "279/280," both when the game state is normal game state and when the game state is shortened time game state. By allowing different special symbol win probabilities for each setting value in this way, it becomes easier for the arcade to manage the payout. Note that the probability of a minor win is the same for all settings.

Furthermore, in the shortened play state, compared to the normal play state, as shown in Figures 5(B) and 6(B), the normal symbol win determination process makes it easier to win with a normal symbol, and a more favorable opening and closing mode is selected for the protruding member of the second start opening 22 when a normal symbol win occurs. Therefore, the shortened play state can be said to be a more advantageous play state for the player than the normal play state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode, even if the special symbol win detection process determines that the special symbol is a miss, it is always determined to be a minor win. In contrast, in the normal game mode, it is never determined to be a minor win. Therefore, the time-saving game mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal game mode.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 3, the gate member 20 is located on the right side of the game area 7, but not on the left side. If, during normal gameplay, the player shoots to the right and passes the game ball through the gate member 20, as shown in Figure 5, the probability of a normal win is "4/256". Therefore, the protruding member of the second start opening 22 can open. However, since the opening time is "0.9S", it is difficult to get the game ball into the second start opening 22, and most of the shot game balls will pass through the out opening 25. Therefore, during normal gameplay, shooting to the left and getting the game ball into the first start opening 21 is the optimal way for the player to play. For this reason, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball during normal gameplay, a left-shoot notification is issued to encourage the player to play in the optimal way.

If, during normal gameplay, the player shoots to the right and the game ball passes through the gate member 20, resulting in the game ball entering the second start opening 22, the special symbol win detection process will not be executed. This prevents inappropriate gameplay.

Next, the regular symbol win determination table in Figure 5(B) is stored in the main ROM 102. When the game state is the normal game state, the probability of a regular symbol win being determined in the regular symbol win determination process is "4/256", and the probability of a regular symbol loss is "252/256". When the game state is the time-saving game state, the probability of a regular symbol win being determined in the regular symbol win determination process is "251/256", and the probability of a regular symbol loss is "5/256". Therefore, the time-saving game state is more favorable to the player than the normal game state, as it is easier to determine a regular symbol win in the regular symbol win determination process. Note that although there are no setting values in the regular symbol win determination table (the setting values are common), setting values may be set in the same way as in the special symbol win determination table. For example, setting value "6" may result in a higher probability of hitting a regular symbol in the regular symbol win detection compared to setting value "1". Furthermore, while the probability of a regular symbol win being detected during normal gameplay is set to "4/256" and the probability of a regular symbol loss to "252/256", the probability of a regular symbol loss is not limited to these values; it may also be set to "256/256".

Next, we will explain the special symbol determination table and the regular symbol determination table using Figure 6. First, the special symbol determination table in Figure 6(A) has two tables: (1) a table for the first start opening 21, which is referenced when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol indicator 27a based on whether the special symbol hit determination process is performed when a game ball enters the first start opening 21, and whether the result is a special symbol hit or a special symbol miss; and (2) a table for the second start opening 22, which is referenced when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the second special symbol indicator 27b based on whether the special symbol hit determination process is performed when a game ball enters the second start opening 22, and whether the result is a special symbol hit or a special symbol miss. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. The main CPU 101 then refers to the table corresponding to the start opening into which the game ball entered and determines the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, the game awarded when a special symbol win is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting port 21 is called "Big Win 1 Game," the game awarded when a special symbol win is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting port 22 is called "Big Win 1 Game," the game awarded when a minor win is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting port 22 is called "Minor Win Game," and the game awarded when a Type 2 Big Win transition control process (see Figure 24) is executed as a result of the execution of the "Minor Win Game" is called "Big Win 2 Game." In other words, the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is a so-called "Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine" that has a route to transition to a Big Win game via a special symbol win and a route to transition to a Big Win game via a minor win game. The "Big Win 1 Game" is described in detail in Figure 22, the "Big Win 2 Game" is described in detail in Figure 25, and the "Minor Win Game" is described in detail in Figure 23.

In the special symbol determination table in (1) of Figure 6(A), if the special symbol hit determination process is performed and it is determined to be a special symbol hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "Special Symbol A" and "Special Symbol B". Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the special symbol is determined by referring to the obtained random number for special symbol determination. For example, if the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "0 to 50", "Special Symbol A" is determined, and if the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "51 to 99", "Special Symbol B" is determined. Once the special symbol is determined, the "number of rounds" and "after 1 big win" (game state after 1 big win) are uniquely determined. If "Special Symbol A" is determined, 4 rounds are assigned as the "number of rounds", and a time-saving game state is assigned as the "after 1 big win". If "Special Symbol B" is determined, 4 rounds are assigned as the "Round Count," and the game returns to a normal play state as "After 1 Big Win." On the other hand, if the special symbol hit detection process results in a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines "Special Symbol C." "Special Symbol C," being a special symbol miss, does not have a predetermined "Round Count" or "After 1 Big Win." For example, if "Special Symbol C" is determined during a normal play state, the game remains in a normal play state even after the "Special Symbol C" confirmation is displayed.

In the special symbol determination table shown in (2) of Figure 6(A), if the special symbol hit determination process results in a special symbol hit, the main CPU 101 determines "Special Symbol D". The specific determination method is the same as in (1) of Figure 6(A) described above, so the explanation is omitted. If "Special Symbol D" is determined, 10 rounds are assigned as the "Round Count," and a time-saving game state is assigned as "After 1 Big Win." On the other hand, if the special symbol hit determination process results in a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines "Special Symbol E."

Thus, in the case of a special symbol win, the probability of being granted a time-saving game state is 51% for the first start port 21 and 100% for the second start port 22. Therefore, it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to be granted one jackpot game based on ball entry into the second start port 22 than based on ball entry into the first start port 21.

In this embodiment, no setting values were provided in the special symbol determination table, but setting values may be provided. For example, the determination ratio of special symbols may differ depending on whether the setting value is "1" or "6". In that case, the rate of entering the time-saving game state will be the same for all setting values, but the "number of rounds" may be made to differ in proportion to each setting value. For example, a setting value of "6" may make it easier to be awarded a favorable number of rounds, or a setting value of "1" may make it easier to be awarded a favorable number of rounds.

In the special symbol determination table shown in (3) of Figure 6(A), if the special symbol hit detection process results in a minor win, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "Special Symbol F" or "Special Symbol G". The specific determination method is the same as in (1) of Figure 6(A) described above, so the explanation is omitted. However, the probability of "Special Symbol F" being determined is "80/100", and the probability of "Special Symbol G" being determined is "20/100". If "Special Symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are assigned as the "Round Count", and a time-saving game state is assigned as "After 2 Big Wins". On the other hand, if "Special Symbol G" is determined, 10 rounds are assigned as the "Round Count", and a normal game state is assigned as "After 2 Big Wins".

In Figure 6(A) (3), the 10 rounds in the special symbol determination table refer, strictly speaking, to a minor win in the first round and two major wins in rounds 2 through 10. As will be explained in detail later in the minor win game processing section, the condition for transitioning to the second round and beyond is that the specific area detection SW32c detects a game ball during the first round of the minor win game. If the specific area detection SW32c does not detect a game ball during the first round of the minor win game, the game will not proceed to the second round, and will end after the minor win game is completed. After the minor win game ends, the game will return to the normal game state.

Next, the normal symbol determination table in Figure 6(B) is stored in the main ROM 102. Based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed. This table is referenced when determining which normal symbol to display on the normal symbol indicator 27e, depending on whether the result is a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol miss. When the game state is normal game mode, the main CPU 101 determines "Normal Symbol A" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related processing if the result is a normal symbol hit, and "Normal Symbol B" if the result is a normal symbol miss. Furthermore, when the game state is time-saving game mode, the main CPU 101 determines "Normal Symbol C" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related processing if the result is a normal symbol hit, and "Normal Symbol D" if the result is a normal symbol miss.

Furthermore, even with regular symbols, the content assigned is uniquely determined, similar to the special symbols mentioned above. If "Regular Symbol A" is determined, the protruding member of the second start opening 22 opens once in 0.9 seconds. If "Regular Symbol B" is determined, the protruding member of the second start opening 22 does not open. If "Regular Symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second start opening 22 opens three times in 1.8 seconds. If "Regular Symbol D" is determined, the protruding member of the second start opening 22 does not open. Therefore, compared to the normal game state, the opening and closing pattern of the protruding member of the second start opening 22 is more favorable when a regular symbol is hit, making it a more advantageous game state for the player.

Furthermore, the state in which the protruding member of the second start port 22 opens 3 times in 1.8 seconds is referred to as the "electric support state." On the other hand, the state in which the protruding member of the second start port 22 opens 1 time in 0.9 seconds is referred to as the "non-electric support state." For example, when the main CPU 101 controls the "electric support state," it sets "1" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103, and when it controls the "non-electric support state," it sets "0" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103.

Although no setting values are provided in the normal symbol determination table, setting values may be provided in the same way as in the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of determining a normal symbol win in the normal symbol win determination process may differ for each setting value. For example, setting value "6" may make it easier to win compared to setting value "1," or vice versa. Furthermore, the opening and closing pattern of the second start port 22 may differ for each setting value. For example, setting value "6" may open and close in a more advantageous manner compared to setting value "1," or vice versa.

As described above, since it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded one jackpot game based on balls entering the second start port 22 rather than based on balls entering the first start port 21, in the time-saving game state where the second start port 22 can be opened in "1.8S x 3 times", the optimal game for the player is to shoot to the right and get the game balls into the second start port 22. Furthermore, since minor jackpot games are not awarded based on balls entering the first start port 21, and are only awarded based on balls entering the second start port 22, it is more advantageous for the player if the special symbol win determination process is executed based on balls entering the second start port 22. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the optimal game for the player is to shoot to the right and get the game balls into the second start port 22. Therefore, when the first start port detection SW21a detects a game ball during the shortened game mode, a right-hand shooting notification is issued to encourage the player to play in the most optimal way possible.

Next, Figure 6(C) shows the round details for each winning special symbol. For special symbols A and B, the first large prize opening 24 will be open for 29.5 seconds per round, and this will be repeated four times. For special symbol D, the first large prize opening 24 will be open for 29.5 seconds per round, and this will be repeated ten times. For special symbols F and G, the second large prize opening 32 will be open for 10 seconds in the first round, and the first large prize opening 31 will be open for 29.5 seconds in the second round, and this will be repeated nine times. Furthermore, in the case of special symbols F and G, for example, if the launch handle 8 is maintained at the second launch intensity, it is possible to launch the game ball into the specific area detection SW 32c in the first round, and also to launch the game ball into the first large prize pocket 31 in the second round and beyond (there is no need to change the launch intensity between the first round and the second round and beyond). This prevents the game from becoming complicated for the player.

In addition, during minor win games, the minor win game may end before 10 seconds have elapsed if one ball enters the specific area detection switch 32c and nine balls enter the second major prize entry point detection switch 32a.

In this embodiment, the game states (excluding Big Win 1, Big Win 2, and Minor Win games) consist of a normal game state and a time-saving game state. Both the normal game state and the time-saving game state are low-probability states (special symbol win probability of 1/319), and this embodiment does not include a high-probability state. Furthermore, only the time-saving game state is an "electric support state," while the normal game state, Big Win 1, Big Win 2, and Minor Win games are "non-electric support states."

The time-saving game state ends upon transitioning to a big win game or a minor win game (first termination condition). Other termination conditions include, for example, 100 symbol variation games being played (second termination condition). However, if a game ball is entered into the second starting port 22, even if the special symbol is judged to be a miss, a minor win is guaranteed. Therefore, the game mostly ends under the first termination condition. Exceptionally, if a game ball continues to be entered into the first starting port 21 during the time-saving game state, the second termination condition may be met.

In this embodiment, only a low-probability state is included, but a high-probability state (probability variation game state) may also be included, as well as a time-saving game state (so-called c-time-saving) that is entered when a specific symbol combination is displayed as confirmed, and a time-saving game state (so-called b-time-saving) that is entered when a predetermined number of symbol variation games are executed without determining a special symbol win.

Next, we will explain the special symbol variation pattern table using Figure 7.
The special symbol variation pattern table in Figure 7 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table that is referenced when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game.

When the game state is in the normal game state, if the special symbol win determination process is performed and the result is a special symbol miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of the variation patterns from "Variation Pattern 1" to "Variation Pattern 8". Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start opening 21, a random number for determining the variation pattern is obtained, and the CPU determines one of the variation patterns by referring to the obtained random number for determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, when a game ball enters the first start opening 21, a random number for determining a reach is obtained, and if the random number for determining a reach corresponds to a random number that executes a reach, one of the variation patterns from "Variation Pattern 3" to "Variation Pattern 8" is determined, and if the random number for determining a reach does not correspond to a random number that executes a reach, either "Variation Pattern 1" or "Variation Pattern 2" is determined. On the other hand, when the game state is in the normal game state, and the special symbol win determination process is performed, the main CPU 101, if it determines a special symbol win, refers to a random number for determining the variation pattern and selects one of the variation patterns from "Variation Pattern 9" to "Variation Pattern 15".

Then, once the variation pattern is determined, the "performance content" and the "variation time" (seconds S) are determined in a unique way. If "Variation Pattern 1" is determined, "Shortened Variation" is determined as the "performance content" and "2S" is determined as the "variation time". "Shortened Variation" refers to a variation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c simultaneously. If "Variation Pattern 2" is determined, "Normal Variation" is determined as the "performance content" and "7S" is determined as the "variation time". "Normal Variation" refers to a variation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c in order. If "Variation Pattern 3" is determined, "Normal Reach" is determined as the "performance content" and "15S" is determined as the "variation time". A "normal reach" refers to a reach where the reels show a reach animation, but without any special development animations (for example, an animation where the middle decorative symbol 26b changes after a temporary stop on a miss). Because it has a low probability of resulting in a special symbol win and a high probability of resulting in a special symbol loss, it is considered a reach with a low expectation of a special symbol win.

If "Variation Pattern 4" is determined, "Super Reach 1" is determined as the "Performance Content" and "40S" is determined as the "Variation Time". "Super Reach 1" is a reach in which a development performance is performed during the execution of a reach (normal reach), and at the development destination, for example, a live-action image is displayed on the image display device 26. The selection rate when a special symbol is hit is higher than that of a "normal reach", and the selection rate when a special symbol is missed is lower than that of a "normal reach", so it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol hit than a "normal reach". If "Variation Pattern 5" is determined, "Super Reach 2" is determined as the "Performance Content" and "50S" is determined as the "Variation Time". "Super Reach 2" refers to a reach (normal reach) that develops during the execution of a normal reach, and in the resulting development, for example, displays a live-action image on the image display device 26. Because the selection rate for a special symbol win is higher than that of a "normal reach," and the selection rate for a special symbol miss is lower than that of a "normal reach," it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol win than a "normal reach." Note that the expectation of a special symbol win may be the same as that of "Super Reach 1," or it may be positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol win than "Super Reach 1."

If "Variation Pattern 6" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 2 Normal Reach" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "30S" is determined as the "Variation Time." "Pseudo-Consecutive" will be explained in detail later, but "Pseudo-Consecutive 2 Normal Reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol win than "Normal Reach" alone, and a lower expectation of a special symbol win than "Super Reach 1 and 2." If "Variation Pattern 7" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 1" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "70S" is determined as the "Variation Time." "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 1" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol win than "Super Reach 1" alone. If "Variation Pattern 8" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 2" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "80S" is determined as the "Variation Time." "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 2" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a special symbol win than "Super Reach 2" alone. "Variation Pattern 9" through "Variation Pattern 14" are identical to "Variation Pattern 3" through "Variation Pattern 8" except for whether the special symbol is a miss or a hit; the presentation and variation time are the same, so the explanation is omitted.

If "Variation Pattern 15" is determined, "Full Rotation Reach" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "120S" is determined as the "Variation Time." "Full Rotation Reach" is a reach where the left decorative symbol 26a, middle decorative symbol 26b, and right decorative symbol 26c are aligned as "111," "222," "333," "444," "555," "666," "777," and "888," and then scroll (variate display) at a slow speed, ultimately displaying, for example, "777."

Furthermore, the selectable variation patterns in the case of a special symbol win may be determined by the selected special symbol. For example, variation patterns 9 to 14 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A or special symbol B is selected, while variation pattern 15 may be selectable only when special symbol A is selected. Alternatively, variation patterns 9 to 15 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A or special symbol B is selected.

When the game state is in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol win detection process. If the result is a special symbol miss, it determines the "variation pattern 16". If "variation pattern 16" is determined, "ultra-short variation" is determined as the "performance content," and "1S" is determined as the "variation time." "Ultra-short variation" refers to a variation that does not result in a reach, and simultaneously stops the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c. Note that in the time-saving game state, if a game ball is entered into the second start port 22, a special symbol miss cannot occur, so "variation pattern 16" is not necessary.

Furthermore, when the game is in a shortened play state, if the special symbol win determination process results in a minor win, "Variation Pattern 17" is determined. If "Variation Pattern 17" is determined, "Super Shortened Variation" is set as the "Performance Content," and "1S" is set as the "Variation Time." In other words, in the case of a minor win, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are stopped simultaneously without any reach sequence.

Furthermore, when the game is in a shortened play state, if the special symbol win determination process results in a special symbol win, then "Variation Pattern 18" is determined. If "Variation Pattern 18" is determined, "Super Shortened Variation" is set as the "Performance Content," and "1S" is set as the "Variation Time." In other words, if a special symbol win occurs, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are stopped simultaneously without any reach sequence.

In this way, whether it's a minor win or a special symbol win, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c are stopped simultaneously without any reach animation. This allows for a smooth and enjoyable "RUSH" (for example, the period from transitioning to a time-saving game state until hitting the special symbol G and returning to the normal game state), providing a satisfying experience for the player.

Furthermore, if the player performs a "left-handed shot" during the shortened play mode and enters the first starting gate 21, one of the variation patterns 1 to 15 will be executed depending on the result of the special symbol win detection process.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation patterns are not limited to those shown in Figure 7; multiple special symbol variation patterns may be included. Also, the special symbol variation pattern table referenced may differ depending on the setting value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easily selectable may be provided for each setting value, or a special symbol variation pattern that can only be selected for a specific setting value may be provided. This allows players to infer (or understand) the setting value from the content of the executed special symbol variation pattern, leading to an improvement in the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the commands transmitted from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200 will be explained based on Figures 8 and 9. Note that Figures 8 and 9 show only the main commands, and some commands have been omitted.

The "First Special Symbol Memory Designation Command" (0-4) indicates the number of First Special Symbols held. When the number of First Special Symbols held increases or decreases, it is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Second Special Symbol Memory Designation Command" (0) indicates the number of second special symbols held. When the number of second special symbols increases or decreases, this command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Performance Symbol Specification Command" indicates the type of special symbol to be displayed during the stop animation. When the various special symbols are determined and the special symbol variation display begins, this command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "minor win designation command" indicates that a minor win has been achieved. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the special symbol variation display begins and transmitted to the performance control board 200. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 200 determines the combination of decorative symbols that will announce the minor win.

The "Special Symbol Variation Pattern Specification Command" indicates the variation time of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the variation display of the special symbols begins on the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Special Symbol Confirmation Command" indicates that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, and then transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Normal Symbol Confirmation Command" indicates that a normal symbol has stopped being displayed. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the normal symbol display unit 27e stops displaying a normal symbol, and is transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Starting Gate Entry Designation Command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 in advance that a game ball has entered the starting gate and the result of the special symbol winning determination process. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a game ball enters the first starting gate 21 or the second starting gate 22.

The "Grand Prize Entrance Designation Command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 of the entry of a game ball into the first grand prize entrance 21 and the entry of a game ball into the second grand prize entrance 22. When a game ball enters the first grand prize entrance 21, or when a game ball enters the second grand prize entrance 22, this command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Specific Area Prize Entry Command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 of a game ball entering the specific area detection SW32c. When a game ball enters the specific area detection SW32c, this command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Special Feature Winning Game Opening Designation Command" indicates the start of a jackpot game. It is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a 4-round or 10-round jackpot game begins.

The "Opening Command for Minor Win Game" indicates the start of a minor win game. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the minor win game begins and transmitted to the performance control board 200. Furthermore, an opening command indicating the start of the second major win game may be provided when the minor win game ends and the second major win game begins.

The "Round Specification Command" indicates the number of rounds for each jackpot game (Game 1 and Game 2). It is set in the main RAM 103 when the rounds of each jackpot game begin and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Special Feature Winning Game Ending Specification Command" indicates the end of Big Win 1 and Big Win 2 games. It is set in the main RAM 103 when each Big Win game ends and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Ending Specification Command for Minor Winning Games" indicates the end of a minor winning game. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the minor winning game ends and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Normal Symbol Memory Specification Command" (0-4) indicates the number of normal symbols to be held. When the value stored in the normal symbol holding count memory area increases or decreases, it is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Normal Symbol Specification Command" (Normal Symbols 0-3) indicates the type of normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 27e. When a specific normal symbol is determined and the variation display of the normal symbols begins, this command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Normal Symbol Variation Specification Command" indicates the variation time for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 27e. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the normal symbol variation display begins and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Opening Command for Normal Win" indicates the start of a normal win game. It is set in the main RAM 103 when the normal win game begins and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Ending Specification Command for Normal Wins" indicates the end of various normal win games. It is set in the main RAM 103 when a normal win game ends and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Game State Specification Command" indicates whether the game is in normal game mode or time-saving game mode. Depending on the game state specification command, it is set in the main RAM 103 at the start of special symbol reel spinning, at the end of special symbol reel spinning (at the start of Big Win 1 and Big Win 2 games), and at the end of Big Win 1 and Big Win 2 games, and transmitted to the performance control board 200. Each game state specification command is described in detail in the flowchart.

The "Power-On Command" and the "Power-Restore Command" (for waiting for customers, during special symbol changes, and during special symbol wins) indicate whether or not powering on the pachinko machine 1 involves initializing the main RAM 103. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON, the power-on command or power-restore command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 103 has been initialized, and the game state, are transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Customer Waiting State Specification Command" indicates that the machine is in a customer waiting state where no special symbol variations are displayed. When this state is reached, the command is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Error Specification Command" (various types) indicates that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and the type of error. When the occurrence of any type of abnormality is detected, it is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Error Clearing Command" (various types) indicates that an error that occurred in the pachinko machine 1 has been resolved. When the resolution of various abnormalities is detected, it is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "Setting Value Specification Commands" (1-6) indicate the setting values set in the pachinko machine 1. These commands are sent to the performance control board 200 after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON, specifically after the power-on specification command or power-restoration specification command is sent, during the execution of the setting change process, or during the execution of the setting confirmation process.

The "Setting Value Change in Progress" command indicates that a setting change process is being executed and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting change process is running.
The "Checking Settings Command" indicates that the settings confirmation process is being executed and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the settings confirmation process is running.
The "Setting Value Confirmation Complete Command" indicates that the setting confirmation process has finished and is sent to the performance control board 200 during the execution of the setting confirmation process.

Next, the control processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 will be explained.

(Regarding the main processing on the main control board)
Figure 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing performed on the main control board 100. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 and voltage is supplied to each control board from the power supply board 400.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 is experiencing a power outage (blackout). If it is, the process in step S1 is repeated; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2. If the machine is experiencing a power outage, the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 disables interrupts (the main control board timer interrupt processing). As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only this process until interrupts are enabled in step S18, which will be described later. Once interrupts are disabled, the process moves to step S3.

Furthermore, after completing the processing in step S2, a launch stop signal (launch stop command) may be output to disable the launch permission signal. This prevents the game ball from being launched while the interrupt is disabled. Then, in the first main control board timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is enabled in step S18 (described later), the launch permission signal should be set to the enabled state.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (pressed down). That is, it determines whether the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned ON (power switch SW400a is ON) while the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed down. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S4; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. For example, if it detects that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key has been rotated 90 degrees, it determines that the setting change key is in the setting change position. If the above detection is not performed, it determines that the setting change key is not in the setting change position. As a result, if the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S5; if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 executes the setting value change process shown in Figure 11. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 11. After the setting value change process is completed, the process moves on to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 sends a power-on command. The power-on command indicates that the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power has been turned on. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it sends a message to the image display device 26 via the image and sound control unit 200b, for example, displaying "Powering on" and outputting the message "Powering on" from the speaker 10. After sending the power-on command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S7)
In step S7, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power switch SW400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes area 1 and area 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103. This allows, for example, if the game is in a time-saving game state when the arcade closes, to start from the normal game state when the arcade opens the next day. After initializing area 1 and area 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 sends a power-on command. After sending the power-on command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. If the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S10; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 executes the setting value verification process shown in Figure 12. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 12. After the setting value verification process is completed, the process moves on to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is backed-up data. For example, when the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned OFF, a backup process (not shown) is performed, which includes data retention, checksum storage, and setting of the backup flag. If the backup flag is ON, it is determined that there is backed-up data; if the backup flag is not ON, it is determined that there is no backed-up data. As a result, if there is backed-up data, the process moves to step S12; if there is no backed-up data, it is determined that this is the first power-on and the process moves to step S17.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 area. After calculating the checksum of the main RAM 103 area, the process moves on to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the main RAM 103 area is normal. For example, it determines whether the checksum value stored in a backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S12. If they match, it determines that the checksum is normal; if they do not match, it determines that the checksum is not normal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S15; if the checksum is not normal, the process proceeds to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 executes a game stop process (error setting). Specifically, it sends an error command to the performance control board 200 to trigger error notification using the light-emitting device 9, speaker 10, image display device 26, etc., or it performs a process that makes it impossible to clear the error unless the setting value change process shown in Figure 13 is performed. The process remains in place until the setting value change process shown in Figure 13 is performed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a recovery process, that is, it restores the system to the state it was in before the power outage. Once the system has successfully restored to the state it was in before the power outage, the process proceeds to step S16.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 sends a power recovery command. The power recovery command indicates that the RAM clear switch 105 is OFF and power has been restored (returning to the state before the power outage). When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays "Power recovery in progress" on the image display device 26 via the image and sound control unit 200b, and outputs the audio "Power recovery in progress" from the speaker 10. After sending the power recovery command, the process moves to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs the CTC setting. Specifically, it sets up the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which has functions such as creating pulse outputs at a fixed period and measuring time, and sets the CTC's time constant register so that the main control board timer interrupt processing described later is performed periodically every 4ms. After performing the CTC setting, the process moves on to step S18.

(Step S18)
In step S18, the main CPU 101 enables interrupts (making the game playable). After enabling interrupts, it waits, and thereafter, the main control board timer interrupt processing described later is performed every 4ms.

(Regarding the process of changing settings)
Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the setting value change process performed on the main control board 100 (a subroutine in step S5 of the main processing of the main control board). The state in which the process in Figure 11 is performed corresponds to the "setting change state" described above.

(Step S5-1)
In step S5-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area). After initializing the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area), the process proceeds to step S5-2.

(Step S5-2)
In step S5-2, the main CPU 101 sends a setting value change command. The setting value change command indicates that the setting value change process is underway. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it sends a message via the image and sound control unit 200b, for example, displaying "Settings being changed" on the image display device 26 and outputting the voice message "Settings being changed" from the speaker 10. After sending the setting value change command, the process moves to step S5-3.

(Step S5-3)
In step S5-3, the main CPU 101 reads the current setting value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", then "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading the current setting value and displaying it on the display 104, the process moves on to step S5-4.

(Step S5-4)
In step S5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S5-5; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-5)
In step S5-5, the main CPU 101 executes a process to change the setting value. For example, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "1", the setting value is changed to "2". When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "2", the setting value is changed to "3". When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "3", the setting value is changed to "4". When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "4", the setting value is changed to "5". When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "5", the setting value is changed to "6". When the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value is "6", the setting value is changed to "1". After changing the setting value, the process moves to step S5-6.

(Step S5-6)
In step S5-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed setting value on the display unit 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "1" is displayed, the setting value "2" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting value "3" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "3" is displayed, the setting value "4" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "4" is displayed, the setting value "5" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "5" is displayed, the setting value "6" is displayed; and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "6" is displayed, the setting value "1" is displayed. After the changed setting value is displayed on the display unit 104, the process moves to step S5-7.

(Step S5-7)
In step S5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontally) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertically). If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5-8; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-8)
In step S5-8, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103. That is, when the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertically) while the desired setting value is displayed on the display 104, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is finalized. As a result, subsequent gameplay will be based on the stored setting value. After the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S5-9.

(Step S5-9)
In step S5-9, the main CPU 101 hides the display unit 104. That is, it hides the setting value displayed on the display unit 104 in step S5-6. After hiding the display unit 104, the process moves to step S5-10.

(Step S5-10)
In step S5-10, the main CPU 101 sends a setting value specification command. The setting value specification command is a command that indicates information about the setting value. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it stores the setting value information in the sub-RAM 203 and refers to the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 203 when executing the setting value suggestion performance described later. Also, when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it terminates the notification such as "Settings are being changed" mentioned above. After sending the setting value specification command, the process moves to step S6 of the main control board's main processing.

Furthermore, even if there is only one setting value, a setting value change process may be performed. In step S5-5, for example, the setting value may be changed from "1" to "1". In step S5-6, for example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "1" is displayed, the setting value "1" may be displayed. Also, in step S5-8, even if the setting value "1" is already stored, it may be updated and stored.

(Regarding the setting value verification process)
Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the setting value verification process performed on the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S10 of the main processing on the main control board). The state in which the process shown in Figure 12 is performed corresponds to the "setting verification state" described above.

(Step S10-1)
In step S10-1, the main CPU 101 sends a setting value verification command. The setting value verification command indicates that the setting value verification process is underway. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays "Settings verification in progress" on the image display device 26 via the image and sound control unit 200b, and outputs the voice message "Settings verification in progress" from the speaker 10. After sending the setting value verification command, the process moves to step S10-2.

(Step S10-2)
In step S10-2, the main CPU 101 reads the current setting value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1", then "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading the current setting value and displaying it on the display 104, the process moves on to step S10-3.

(Step S10-3)
In step S10-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether a termination operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontally) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertically). If a termination operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S10-4; otherwise, the process loops until a termination operation is performed.

(Step S10-4)
In step S10-4, the main CPU 101 hides the display unit 104. That is, it hides the setting value displayed on the display unit 104 in step S10-2. Once the display unit 104 is hidden, the process moves on to step S10-5.

(Step S10-5)
In step S10-5, the main CPU 101 sends a setting value confirmation completion command. This command indicates that the setting value confirmation process is complete. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 200 terminates the notification such as "Settings are being confirmed." After sending the setting value confirmation completion command, the process moves to step S11 of the main control board's main processing.

Furthermore, even if only one setting value is provided, the setting value confirmation process may be performed. Also, if the device does not have any setting values and is designated as a non-setting device, the processes shown in Figures 11 and 12 may be omitted.

(Regarding timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the main control board timer interrupt processing performed on the main control board 100. This processing is performed by periodically interrupting the main control board processing described above (for example, every 4ms).

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves the information stored in the registers. After saving the information stored in the registers, the process moves on to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 executes a time management process to update the timer used in the game (for example, the opening time of the first large prize winning slot 24). After updating the timer used in the game, the process moves on to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates the initial random numbers, such as the random numbers used for determining special symbols, the random numbers used to select special symbols, and the random numbers used to determine the variation pattern. Once the various random number update processes are complete, the process moves on to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 detects input from each SW shown in Figure 4. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 14. Once input from each SW is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 executes processing related to the special symbols. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 18. After completing the processing related to the special symbols, the process moves on to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 executes processing related to the regular symbols. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate member 20, it performs "regular symbol hit determination processing," which includes determining the regular symbol and determining the variation time of the regular symbol. After completing the processing related to the regular symbols, the process moves on to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 executes processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, in the input SW detection process in step S104, if the entry of a game ball is detected, the main CPU 101 sets a payout command signal in the payout command transmission area in order to send a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 in order to pay out the corresponding prize balls, and also receives a payout completion signal from the payout control board 300. After completing the processing related to the payout of game balls, the process moves on to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs an abnormality detection process. For example, it determines whether the magnetic sensor 27h has detected an abnormal magnetism, or whether the radio wave sensor 27i has detected an abnormal radio wave, and if an abnormality is detected, it performs a process to announce an error. After the abnormality detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 101 executes a process to send various commands to the performance control board 200. For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command is set in the command transmission area provided on the main control board 100, and if a command is set, it sends the set command to the performance control board 200 and the payout control board 300. After completing the command transmission process, the process moves on to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, if the main CPU 101 is playing a symbol variation game based on a game ball entering the first start port 21, it controls the display of the special symbols (variation display and confirmation display) on the first special symbol display 27a, and if the symbol variation game is based on a game ball entering the second start port 22, it controls the display of the special symbols (variation display and confirmation display) on the second special symbol display 27b. After finishing the display control of the special symbols, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variation display and confirmation display) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 27e. It also performs display control of the normal symbol hold display unit 27f based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and that the normal symbol variation game has ended. After the normal symbol display control is completed, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 executes game performance information management processing. Specifically, it calculates game performance information using the formula "(number of game balls dispensed in normal game state ÷ number of balls out in normal game state) × 100" and performs processing such as displaying the calculated game performance information on the display unit 104. After completing the game performance information management processing, the process moves on to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. After restoring the saved information to the register, the main control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding input switch detection processing)
Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the input SW detection process performed on the main control board 100 (a subroutine for step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 executes the first start port detection process. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 15. After the first start port detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 101 executes the second start gate detection process when it receives information from the second start gate detection SW22a that a game ball has entered the gate. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 16. After the second start gate detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a game ball has entered the normal prize slot detection SW23a, it executes a process to set a payout command signal in the payout command transmission area in order to pay out 8 game balls as prize balls to the payout control board 300. After the normal prize slot detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a game ball has entered the first large prize slot detection SW24a, it executes a process to set a payout command signal in the payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls. It also sets a large prize slot entry designation command in the command transmission area in order to notify the player that a game ball has entered the first large prize slot 24 using the image display device 26 or the like. Notification using the image display device 26 or the like may include, for example, if more than 10 game balls are detected by the first large prize slot detection SW24a in one round (also called an over-entry), this fact may be notified by a display on the image display device 26 or by sound from the speaker 10 (for example, a sound like "Yes!"), or by an entry emphasis effect (described later). After the first large prize slot detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-5.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 executes the second major prize slot detection process. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 17. After the second major prize slot detection process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 executes the gate detection processing when it receives information from the gate detection SW20a that a game ball has entered the gate. After the gate detection processing is completed, the process moves to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing when the first start port is detected)
Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the processing performed on the main control board 100 when the first start port is detected (subroutine of step S104-1 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start gate detection SW 21a. If it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start gate detection SW 21a, it proceeds to step S104-1-2. If it has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start gate detection SW 21a, it proceeds to step S104-2, which is the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out three game balls as prize balls for a game ball entering the first start opening 21. After setting the prize ball command, the process moves on to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the data has been stored up to the "fourth memory area" mentioned above. That is, it determines whether the number of reserved symbols for the symbol variation game in the first start port 21 is "4". If the data has been stored up to the "fourth memory area", the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process. If the data has not been stored up to the "fourth memory area", the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining whether a special symbol is winning. The random value obtained in this process will be used in the prize-winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see Figure 19), which will be described later. Once the random value for determining whether a special symbol is winning is obtained, the process moves on to step S104-1-5.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining the special symbol. The random value obtained in this process will be used in the prize-winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see Figure 19), which will be described later. After obtaining the random value for determining the special symbol, the process moves on to step S104-1-6.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining the special symbol variation pattern. The random value obtained in this process will be used in the prize-winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see Figure 19), which will be described later. After obtaining the random value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the process moves on to step S104-1-7.

Furthermore, the acquisition of random values for determining special symbol wins, determining special symbol outcomes, and determining special symbol variation patterns may be performed before step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the data has been stored up to the "fourth memory area," the acquired random values may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 stores random values for determining special symbols, random values for determining special symbols, and random values for determining special symbol variation patterns as judgment information in an available memory area. For example, if the "third memory area" is full and the "fourth memory area" is empty, the random values are stored in the "fourth memory area". Once the random values are stored in an available memory area, the process moves to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 executes a win determination process. This win determination process determines whether the random value obtained in step S104-1-4 is a special symbol win, prior to the special symbol win determination process in the special symbol variation start process (see Figure 19). As a result, for example, if the random value for special symbol win determination stored in the "fourth memory area" in step S104-1-7 is a special symbol win, a pre-announcement effect (described later as a "pre-read effect") can be executed across multiple variations. After the win determination process is completed, the process moves on to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 sets the command to specify the first starting slot entry in the command transmission area in order to send the command to the performance control board 200. The command to specify the first starting slot entry also includes information on the result of the entry judgment process in step S104-1-8, and the performance control board 200 can recognize whether the result of the entry judgment process is a win or a loss by receiving this command. After setting the command to specify the first starting slot entry, the process moves to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the first special symbol storage specification command in the command transmission area in order to send the first special symbol storage specification command to the performance control board 200. After setting the first special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S104-2, which is the input SW detection process.

(Regarding the processing when the second start port is detected)
Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the processing performed on the main control board 100 when the second start port is detected (a subroutine in step S104-2 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-2-1)
In step S104-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port detection SW 22a. If it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port detection SW 22a, it proceeds to step S104-2-2. If it has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port detection SW 22a, it proceeds to step S104-3, which is the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-2-2)
In step S104-2-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out two game balls as prize balls for a game ball entering the second start opening 22. After setting the prize ball command, the process moves on to step S104-2-3.

(Step S104-2-3)
In step S104-2-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the data is stored in the "variable memory area". In other words, it determines whether a symbol variation game based on ball entry into the second start opening 22 is currently in progress. If the data is stored in the "variable memory area", the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S104-2-4.

(Step S104-2-4)
In step S104-2-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining whether a special symbol is hit. Once the random value for determining whether a special symbol is hit is obtained, the process moves on to step S104-2-5.

(Step S104-2-5)
In step S104-2-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining the special symbol. Once the random value for determining the special symbol is obtained, the process moves on to step S104-2-6.

(Step S104-2-6)
In step S104-2-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining the special symbol variation pattern. Once the random value for determining the special symbol variation pattern is obtained, the process moves to step S104-2-7.

Furthermore, the acquisition of random values for determining special symbol wins, determining special symbols, and determining special symbol variation patterns may be performed before step S104-2-3. If it is determined in step S104-2-3 that the acquired random values are stored in the "variation memory area," the acquired random values may be discarded.

(Step S104-2-7)
In step S104-2-7, the main CPU 101 stores random values for determining special symbols, random values for determining special symbols, and random values for determining special symbol variation patterns as determination information in the variation memory area. After storing each random value in the available variation memory area, the process moves to step S104-2-8.

(Step S104-2-8)
In step S104-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the command to specify the second starting slot entry in the command transmission area in order to send the command to the performance control board 200. After setting the command to specify the second starting slot entry, the process moves to step S104-2-9.

(Step S104-2-9)
In step S104-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the second special symbol storage specification command in the command transmission area in order to send the second special symbol storage specification command to the performance control board 200. After setting the second special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Regarding the processing when the second major prize slot is detected)
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the processing performed on the main control board 100 when the second large prize slot is detected (subroutine of step S104-5 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-5-1)
In step S104-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether it has received information from the specific area detection SW32c indicating that a game ball has entered the area. If it has received information from the specific area detection SW32c indicating that a game ball has entered the area, it proceeds to step S104-5-2. If it has not received information from the specific area detection SW32c indicating that a game ball has entered the area, it proceeds to step S104-5-8.

(Step S104-5-2)
In step S104-5-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls for a game ball entering the specific area detection SW32c. After setting the prize ball command, the process moves to step S104-5-3.

(Step S104-5-3)
In step S104-5-3, the main CPU 101 obtains a random value for determining the special symbol. Once the random value for determining the special symbol is obtained, the process moves on to step S104-5-4.

(Step S104-5-4)
In step S104-5-4, the main CPU 101 executes the process for determining the special winning symbol. For example, if the random value for determining the special winning symbol obtained in step S104-5-3 is between "0 and 79", then special symbol F is determined. If the random value for determining the special winning symbol obtained in step S104-5-3 is between "80 and 99", then special symbol G is determined. Once the special winning symbol is determined, the process moves to step S104-5-5.

(Step S104-5-5)
In step S104-5-5, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol specification command in the command transmission area in order to allow the special symbol control board 200 to recognize the determined special symbol. For example, if special symbol F is determined, the "Special Symbol F Special Symbol Specification Command" is set, and if special symbol G is determined, the "Special Symbol G Special Symbol Specification Command" is set. After setting the special symbol specification command, the process moves to step S105-5-6, which is the special symbol variation start processing.

(Step S104-5-6)
In step S104-5-6, the main CPU 101 turns ON the specific area pass flag in the specific area pass flag storage area of the main RAM 103. After turning ON the specific area pass flag, the process moves to step S104-5-7.

(Step S104-5-7)
In step S104-5-7, the main CPU 101 sets the command to specify a specific area entry in the command transmission area in order to send the command to the performance control board 200. Upon receiving the command, the performance control board 200 performs a performance (for example, "V-win!") via the image and sound control unit 200b to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area. After setting the command to specify a specific area entry, the process moves to step S104-6, which is the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-8)
In step S104-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second large prize slot detection SW 32a. If it has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second large prize slot detection SW 32a, it proceeds to step S104-5-9. If it has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the second large prize slot detection SW 32a, it proceeds to step S104-6, which is the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-9)
In step S104-5-9, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 15 game balls as prize balls for a game ball entering the second large prize slot detection SW 32a. Once the prize ball command is set, the process moves to step S104-6, which is the input SW detection process.

(Regarding processing related to special patterns)
Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the special pattern-related processing performed on the main control board 100 (a subroutine for step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating "stopped" is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "1" to indicate variation in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-2-12 in Figure 19 described later), and when it stops the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "0" to indicate stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in Figure 21 described later). After setting the value "0" to indicate stopped, if it is a special symbol win, the value "2" indicating a big win 1 game is set, and if it is a small win game, the value "3" indicating a small win game is set. If the value "0" indicating that the system is stopped is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-3.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol variation start processing. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 19. After the special symbol variation start processing is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating "in progress" is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "1" indicating "in progress" is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol variation processing. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 20. After the special symbol variation processing is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating a jackpot 1 game is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "2" indicating a jackpot 1 game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-6; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-7.

(Step S105-6)
In step S105-6, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot 1 game processing. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 22. After the jackpot 1 game processing is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-7)
In step S105-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating a minor win game is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "3" indicating a minor win game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-8; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-9.

(Step S105-8)
In step S105-8, the main CPU 101 performs the minor win game processing. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 23. After the minor win game processing is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9)
In step S105-9, the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating stopped is not set, that the value "1" indicating in motion is not set, that the value "2" indicating a jackpot 1 game is not set, and that the value "3" indicating a minor win game is not set. If it determines that the value "4" indicating a jackpot 2 game is set, it then determines that the jackpot 2 game processing is performed. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 25. After the jackpot 2 game processing is completed, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing at the start of special symbol changes)
Figure 19 is a flowchart showing the processing performed on the main control board 100 when the special symbol variation starts (a subroutine for step S105-2 of the special symbol-related processing).

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a memory in the variable memory area of the variable game corresponding to the second start port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a memory in the variable memory area, the process moves to step S105-2-6; if there is no memory in the variable memory area, the process moves to step S105-2-2.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a hold in the hold storage area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process moves to step S105-2-3; if there is no hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process moves to step S105-2-5.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved slots in the first start slot 21. This subtraction involves sliding the judgment information (random value) from "the variable memory area" to "the fourth memory area," and then clearing the memory area of "1." Consequently, the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c also changes to a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved slots (from "flashing" to "on," or from "on" to "off"). After subtracting "1" from the number of reserved slots in the first start slot 21, the process moves to step S105-2-4.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 sets a first special symbol storage specification command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the number of reserved symbols managed by the performance control board 200. After setting the first special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting state specification command in the command transmission area in order to display the "waiting for customers" screen on the image display device 26. After setting the customer waiting state specification command, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

The "Waiting for Customers" screen is a state in which, for example, the sub-symbols that were confirmed and displayed in the last completed symbol variation game, the background image that was displayed in the last completed symbol variation game, and the variation icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are displayed. In addition, images that indicate that volume and brightness can be adjusted (for example, a level gauge image or an image resembling a directional pad button) are also displayed. After a predetermined time has elapsed in the "Waiting for Customers" state, a "demo performance" is executed. In the "demo performance," the sub-symbols and background image that were displayed in the "Waiting for Customers" state, as well as the variation icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are not displayed. Instead, for example, the entire display area is used to display the machine name, manufacturer name, and warning information to prevent excessive gambling. Then, after the designated time has elapsed during the "demonstration," the system will revert to "waiting for customers."

Alternatively, the command to specify the waiting state may be omitted. In this case, the performance control board 200 can measure the time elapsed since the end of the previous symbol variation game. If a predetermined time has been measured without receiving a new start command (such as a special symbol variation pattern specification command), the "Waiting for Customers" screen can be displayed. This eliminates the need for the customer waiting state specification command, thereby reducing the number of commands and simplifying control.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, if the main CPU 101 has performed step S105-2-1, it uses the judgment information (random value) acquired and stored in the second start gate detection process to execute the special symbol hit determination process. If the process has performed step S105-2-4, it uses the judgment information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start gate detection process to execute the special symbol hit determination process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 20. After the special symbol hit determination process is completed, the process moves to step S105-2-7.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols in the symbol variation game (using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 7). Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, the process moves to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol variation pattern specification command in the command transmission area in order to send a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-7 to the performance control board 200. For example, if "Variation Pattern 9" was determined in step S105-2-7, a special symbol variation pattern specification command indicating "Variation Pattern 9" is set. After setting the special symbol variation pattern specification command, the process moves to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the time management counter in the main RAM 103 with the variation time (see Figure 7) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-7. For example, if "Variation Pattern 9" is determined, the variation time "15S" is set. After setting the variation time, the process moves to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
In step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the value "1" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that the symbol is changing. This allows the system to recognize that the special symbol is changing. In this process, the system also starts subtracting the change time set in step S105-2-9. After setting the value "1" in the special symbol status flag storage area to indicate that the symbol is changing, the system proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

In the explanation of Figure 19 above, if there is judgment information for the second starting port 22 in step S105-2-1, the special symbol hit judgment process is executed with priority over the first starting port 21. However, the special symbol hit judgment process may also be executed in the order in which the balls entered the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22.

(Regarding the special symbol win detection process)
Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit detection process performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-2-6 of the special symbol variation start processing).

(Step S105-2-6-1)
In step S105-2-6-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a special symbol win. That is, it determines whether the random value for win determination in the determination information (random value) matches the random value for special symbol win. If it is a special symbol win, the process moves to step S105-2-6-2; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-2-6-3.

(Step S105-2-6-2)
In step S105-2-6-2, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol. That is, it determines the special symbol using a random value for determining the special symbol and a special symbol determination table. Once the special symbol is determined, the process moves to step S105-2-6-6.

(Step S105-2-6-3)
In step S105-2-6-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a minor win. That is, it determines whether the random value for win determination in the determination information (random value) matches the random value for minor win. If it is a minor win, the process moves to step S105-2-6-4; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-2-6-5.

(Step S105-2-6-4)
In step S105-2-6-4, the main CPU 101 sets a minor win designation command in the command transmission area to make the performance control board 200 recognize that a minor win has been achieved. Once the minor win designation command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-7, which is the special symbol variation start processing.

(Step S105-2-6-5)
In step S105-2-6-5, the main CPU 101 determines the losing special symbol. That is, it uses a random value for determining the special symbol and a special symbol determination table to determine the losing special symbol. Once the losing special symbol is determined, the process moves to step S105-2-6-7.

(Step S105-2-6-6)
In step S105-2-6-6, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol specification command in the command transmission area in order to allow the special symbol control board 200 to recognize the determined special symbol. For example, if special symbol A is determined, the command "Special Symbol A Special Symbol Specification Command" is set. Once the special symbol specification command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-7, which is the special symbol variation start processing.

(Step S105-2-6-7)
In step S105-2-6-7, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol specification command in the command transmission area in order to allow the special symbol control board 200 to recognize the determined special symbol. For example, if special symbol C is determined, the command "Special Symbol C Special Symbol Specification Command" is set. Once the special symbol specification command is set, the process moves to step S105-2-7, which is the special symbol variation start processing.

(Regarding processing during special symbol changes)
Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set variation time has elapsed using the time management counter in the main RAM 103. For example, if "Variation Pattern 9" is determined and "15S" is set, it determines whether "15S" has elapsed. If the variation time for the special symbol has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-4-2; otherwise, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol confirmation command in the command transmission area in order to send a special symbol confirmation command to the performance control board 200 to stop the sub-symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner on the image display device 26. After setting the special symbol confirmation command, the process moves on to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that the special symbol is stopped. This allows the CPU to recognize that the special symbol is stopped. After setting the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area to indicate that the special symbol is stopped, the process moves to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
In step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of step S105-2-6 in Figure 19 is a special symbol win. If it is a special symbol win, the process moves to step S105-4-5; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-5)
In step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets a value (2) indicating "Big Win 1" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the system to recognize that it is Big Win 1 (Big Win 1 game). After setting the value (2) indicating "Big Win 1" in the special symbol state flag storage area, the system proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
In step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate "non-electric support state". As a result, the game enters a "non-electric support state" during the first big win. After setting "0" to indicate "non-electric support state", the process moves to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
In step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 transitions to the jackpot 1 game opening, which notifies that jackpot 1 game has started. For example, the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103 stores the state during jackpot 1 game, with "0" set for the opening, "1" set if the first jackpot entry point 24 is open, "2" set for the interval between rounds, and "3" set for the ending. After transitioning to the jackpot 1 game opening, the process moves to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 sets an opening specification command in the command transmission area in order to send an opening specification command to the performance control board 200 to execute the performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot 1 game. For example, when special symbol A is determined, the opening specification command for the 4R special symbol jackpot game is set, and when special symbol D is determined, the opening specification command for the 10R special symbol jackpot game is set. After setting the opening specification command, the process moves to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the first jackpot game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. After setting the time corresponding to the opening of the first jackpot game, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of step S105-2-6 in Figure 19 is a minor win. If it is a minor win, the process moves to step S105-4-11; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-4-16.

(Step S105-4-11)
In step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 sets a value (3) indicating "minor win" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the system to recognize that a minor win (minor win game) is in progress. After setting the value (3) indicating "minor win" in the special symbol state flag storage area, the system proceeds to step S105-4-12.

(Step S105-4-12)
In step S105-4-12, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in the normal symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate "non-electric support state". As a result, the game enters a "non-electric support state" during the first big win. After setting "0" to indicate "non-electric support state", the process moves to step S105-4-13.

(Step S105-4-13)
In step S105-4-13, the main CPU 101 transitions to the mini-win game opening, which notifies that a mini-win game has started. For example, the mini-win state storage area of the main RAM 103 stores the state during the mini-win game; "0" is set if it is the opening, "1" is set if the second large prize slot 32 is open, and "2" is set if it is the ending. After transitioning to the mini-win game opening, the process moves to step S105-4-14.

(Step S105-4-14)
In step S105-4-14, the main CPU 101 sets a small win opening specification command in the command transmission area in order to send an opening specification command to the performance control board 200 to execute the performance corresponding to the opening of the small win game. After setting the small win opening specification command, the process moves to step S105-4-15.

(Step S105-4-15)
In step S105-4-15, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the minor win game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. After setting the time corresponding to the opening of the minor win game, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-16)
In step S105-4-16, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a time-saving count has been set in the time-saving count counter. If a time-saving count has been set in the time-saving count counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-17. If a time-saving count has not been set in the time-saving count counter, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-17)
In step S105-4-17, the main CPU 101 decrements the time-saving count by 1 in the time-saving count counter. After decrementing the time-saving count by 1, the process moves to step S105-4-18.

(Step S105-4-18)
In step S105-4-18, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the time-saving count counter after subtracting 1 is 0. If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-19. If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-4-19)
In step S105-4-19, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, it stores "0" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is in the normal game state. Once the game state is set to the normal game state, the process moves on to step S105-4-20.

(Step S105-4-20)
In step S105-4-20, the main CPU 101 sets the game state specification command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to send the game state specification command (normal) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that it is in a normal game state. After setting the game state specification command (normal), the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing of a jackpot in one game)
Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the processing of a jackpot 1 game performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-6 of the special symbol-related processing).

(Step S105-6-1)
In step S105-6-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the machine is in the opening state. That is, it determines whether the value "0", indicating the opening state, is set in the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the machine is in the opening state, the process proceeds to step S105-6-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-6-4.

(Step S105-6-2)
In step S105-6-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-6-3; otherwise, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-3)
In step S105-6-3, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the first large prize slot 24. It also sets the opening time to 29.5S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. It also sets the round designation command (first opening) in the command transmission area. This starts the first round of the first jackpot game. After opening the first large prize slot 24, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-4)
In step S105-6-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first jackpot opening is open. It checks whether the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103 is set to "1", which indicates that the jackpot opening is open. If the jackpot opening is open, the process moves to step S105-6-5; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-6-7.

(Step S105-6-5)
In step S105-6-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the following conditions for closing the first large prize opening has been met: 29.5 seconds have passed with the first large prize opening 24 remaining open without the detection of 10 balls entering by the first large prize opening detection SW24a, or the entry of 10 balls has been detected by the first large prize opening detection SW24a. If the condition for closing the first large prize opening is met, the process proceeds to step S105-6-6; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-6)
In step S105-6-6, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval, which is the period between the closing and reopening of the first large prize winning slot 24. After transitioning to the inter-round interval, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the interval between rounds, the interval time is set on the counter. This interval time is set to 2.5 seconds for special symbols A and B, and to 0.5 seconds for special symbol D; therefore, a shorter interval time is set for special symbol D.

(Step S105-6-7)
In step S105-6-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is during an interval between rounds. That is, it determines whether "2", which indicates an interval between rounds, is set in the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103. If it is during an interval between rounds, the process moves to step S105-6-8; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-6-12.

(Step S105-6-8)
In step S105-6-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the end of the final round. For example, if, as a result of updating the number of rounds in step S105-6-10 (described later), the number of remaining rounds is "0", then it is determined in that process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-6-9; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-6-10.

(Step S105-6-9)
In step S105-6-9, the main CPU 101 transitions to the ending, which notifies that the first jackpot game has ended. In this process, the time corresponding to the ending of the first jackpot game (for example, 14S) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, and the ending specification command corresponding to the special symbol is set in the command transmission area. After transitioning to the ending, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-10)
In step S105-6-10, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round counter in the main RAM 103. The update method may be increment or decrement. For example, if there are 4 rounds, the round counter in the main RAM 103 may be set to "4" and decremented by 1 each time a round is completed, or the round counter in the main RAM 103 may not be set to "4" and may be incremented by 1 each time a round is completed. After updating the number of rounds, the process moves to step S105-6-11.

(Step S105-6-11)
In step S105-6-11, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the first large prize slot 24. It also sets the opening time to 29.5S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. It also sets the round specification command (for the second and subsequent openings) in the command transmission area. This starts the second round and subsequent rounds of the first jackpot game. After opening the first large prize slot 24, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-12)
In step S105-6-12, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, 14S) has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-6-13; otherwise, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-13)
In step S105-6-13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is either "Special Symbol A" or "Special Symbol D". In other words, it determines whether the special symbol determined based on the special symbol win is either "Special Symbol A" or "Special Symbol D". If the special symbol is either "Special Symbol A" or "Special Symbol D", the process moves to step S105-6-14. If the special symbol is neither "Special Symbol A" nor "Special Symbol D", the process moves to step S105-6-18.

(Step S105-6-14)
In step S105-6-14, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. In this process, the value "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. After setting "1" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-6-15.

(Step S105-6-15)
In step S105-6-15, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving count counter to the time-saving limit (for example, 100). After setting the time-saving count counter to the time-saving limit, the process moves to step S105-6-16.

(Step S105-6-16)
In step S105-6-16, the main CPU 101 sets a game state specification command (time-saving) in the command transmission area in order to send a game state specification command (time-saving) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that the game is in a time-saving game state. After setting the game state specification command (time-saving), the process moves on to step S105-6-17.

(Step S105-6-17)
In step S105-6-17, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that the symbols are stopped. In this process, the value "0" indicating that the symbols are stopped is set, but as mentioned above, during a jackpot game, the special symbols are in a stopped state, so this process is merely setting a flag to start the next spin. After setting the value "0" in the special symbol state flag storage area to indicate that the symbols are stopped, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-6-18)
In step S105-6-18, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, it stores "0" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is in the normal game state. Once the game state is set to the normal game state, the process moves on to step S105-6-19.

(Step S105-6-19)
In step S105-6-19, the main CPU 101 sets the game state specification command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to send the game state specification command (normal) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that it is in a normal game state. After setting the game state specification command (normal), the process moves on to step S105-6-20.

(Step S105-6-20)
In step S105-6-20, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that the symbols are stopped. In this process, the value "0" indicating that the symbols are stopped is set, but as mentioned above, during a jackpot game, the special symbols are in a stopped state, so this process is merely setting a flag to start the next spin. After setting the value "0" in the special symbol state flag storage area to indicate that the symbols are stopped, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the handling of minor wins)
Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the minor win game processing performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-8 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-8-1)
In step S105-8-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the machine is in the opening state. That is, it determines whether the value "0", indicating the opening state, is set in the minor win state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the machine is in the opening state, the process proceeds to step S105-8-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-8-5.

(Step S105-8-2)
In step S105-8-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-8-3; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-3)
In step S105-8-3, the main CPU 101 drives the second large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 32b to open the second large prize slot 32. Also, the time management counter in the main RAM 103 sets the opening time to 10S. This starts the first round of the small prize game. After opening the second large prize slot 32, the process moves to step S105-8-4.

(Step S105-8-4)
In step S105-8-4, the main CPU 101 drives the specific area opening/closing solenoid 32d to control the lid member provided in the specific area from a closed state to an open state. The lid member is opened in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 32, and closed in conjunction with the closing of the second large prize opening 32. After controlling the opening and closing of the lid member in the specific area, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-5)
In step S105-8-5, the main CPU 101 refers to the storage area for the specific area pass flag in the main RAM 103 to determine if the specific area pass flag is ON. If the specific area pass flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S105-8-6; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-8-7.

(Step S105-8-6)
In step S105-8-6, the main CPU 101 performs the Type 2 jackpot transition control processing. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 24. After completing the Type 2 jackpot transition control processing, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-7)
In step S105-8-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second major prize slot is open. That is, it determines whether the value "1", indicating that the second major prize slot is open, is set in the minor prize state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the second major prize slot is open, the process proceeds to step S105-8-8; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-8-11.

(Step S105-8-8)
In step S105-8-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the following conditions for closing the second large prize slot 32 has been met: the 10S opening time for the second large prize slot 32 has elapsed, or the entry of 10 balls has been detected by the second large prize slot detection SW 32a. If the conditions for closing the second large prize slot are met, the process proceeds to step S105-8-9. If the conditions for closing the second large prize slot are not met, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-9)
In step S105-8-9, the main CPU 101 closes the second large prize slot 32 and ends the minor prize game. After ending the minor prize game, the process moves to step S105-8-10.

(Step S105-8-10)
In step S105-8-10, the main CPU 101 transitions to the ending, which notifies that the minor win game has ended. It also sets the time corresponding to the ending (for example, "5S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. After transitioning to the ending, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-11)
In step S105-8-11, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, "5S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-8-12; otherwise, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-8-12)
In step S105-8-12, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the normal game state. Specifically, it stores "0" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is in the normal game state. Once the game state is set to the normal game state, the process moves on to step S105-8-13.

(Step S105-8-13)
In step S105-8-13, the main CPU 101 sets the game state specification command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to send the game state specification command (normal) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that it is in a normal game state. After setting the game state specification command (normal), the process moves on to step S105-8-14.

(Step S105-8-14)
In step S105-8-14, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is stopped. After setting the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area to indicate that it is stopped, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the Type 2 jackpot transition control process)
Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the Type 2 jackpot transition control process performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-8-6 of the minor jackpot game processing).

(Step S105-8-6-1)
In step S105-8-6-1, the main CPU 101 closes the second large prize slot 32 and ends the minor prize game. After ending the minor prize game, the process moves to step S105-8-6-2.

(Step S105-8-6-2)
In step S105-8-6-2, the main CPU 101 turns OFF the specific area pass flag in the specific area pass flag storage area of the main RAM 103. After turning OFF the specific area pass flag, the process moves to step S105-8-6-3.

(Step S105-8-6-3)
In step S105-8-6-3, the main CPU 101 sets the round count counter in the main RAM 103 to the number of rounds (9 rounds, from 2 to 10 rounds). After setting the number of rounds in the main RAM 103's round count counter, the process moves on to step S105-8-6-4.

(Step S105-8-6-4)
In step S105-8-6-4, the main CPU 101 sets a value (4) indicating "Big Win 2" in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. After setting the value (4) indicating "Big Win 2" in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing of two big wins)
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the processing of the jackpot 2 game performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine of step S105-9 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-9-1)
In step S105-9-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the second round have been met. A predetermined interval (for example, "5S") is provided between the end of the minor win game and the start of the second major win game, and once this interval has elapsed, it is determined that the conditions for starting the second round have been met. If the conditions for starting the second round have been met, the process proceeds to step S105-9-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-9-3.

(Step S105-9-2)
In step S105-9-2, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the first large prize slot 24. It also sets the opening time to 29.5S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. It also sets a round specification command (in this case, a round specification command corresponding to the second opening) in the command transmission area. This starts the first round of the second big win game (the second round if the small win game is included). After opening the first large prize slot 24, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-3)
In step S105-9-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first jackpot opening is open. That is, it determines whether the value "1", indicating that the first jackpot opening is open, is set in the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the first jackpot opening is open, the process proceeds to step S105-9-4; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-9-6.

(Step S105-9-4)
In step S105-9-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the following conditions for closing the first large prize opening has been met: 29.5 seconds have passed with the first large prize opening 24 remaining open without the detection of 10 balls entering by the first large prize opening detection SW24a, or the entry of 10 balls has been detected by the first large prize opening detection SW24a. If the condition for closing the first large prize opening is met, the process proceeds to step S105-9-5; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-5)
In step S105-9-5, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval, which is the period between the closing and reopening of the first large prize winning slot 24. After transitioning to the inter-round interval, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the interval between rounds, the interval time is set in the counter. This interval time is set to 0.5 seconds for special symbols F and G. That is, special symbols D, F, and G all have an interval time of 0.5 seconds, allowing for quick completion of jackpot games during RUSH. However, if a special symbol win occurs by entering the first starting gate 21 during RUSH, and for example, special symbol A is determined, the interval between rounds is set to 2.5 seconds, meaning exceptions may occur even during RUSH (and while RUSH is continuing).

(Step S105-9-6)
In step S105-9-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is during an interval between rounds. That is, it determines whether "2", which indicates an interval between rounds, is set in the jackpot state storage area of the main RAM 103. If it is during an interval between rounds, the process moves to step S105-9-7; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-9-11.

(Step S105-9-7)
In step S105-9-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the end of the final round. For example, in step S105-9-9, if the number of remaining rounds is "0" after updating the number of rounds, the CPU determines in that process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-9-8; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S105-9-9.

(Step S105-9-8)
In step S105-9-8, the main CPU 101 transitions to the ending, which notifies that the second jackpot game has ended. It also sets the time corresponding to the ending of the second jackpot game (for example, "14S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103, and sets the ending specification command corresponding to the special symbol in the command transmission area. After transitioning to the ending, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-9)
In step S105-9-9, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round counter in the main RAM 103. After updating the round count, the process moves to step S105-9-10.

(Step S105-9-10)
In step S105-9-10, the main CPU 101 drives the first large prize slot opening/closing solenoid 24b to open the first large prize slot 24. It also sets the opening time to 29.5S in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. It also sets the round specification command (for the third opening and beyond) in the command transmission area. This starts the third round and beyond of the second big win game. After opening the first large prize slot 24, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-11)
In step S105-9-11, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the ending (for example, 14S) has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process moves to step S105-9-12; otherwise, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-12)
In step S105-9-12, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is "Special Symbol F". In other words, it determines whether the special symbol determined in the second major prize entry detection process (Figure 17) is "Special Symbol F". If the special symbol is "Special Symbol F", the process moves to step S105-9-13; otherwise, the process moves to step S105-9-17.

(Step S105-9-13)
In step S105-9-13, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the time-saving game state. In this process, the value "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. After setting "1" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-9-14.

(Step S105-9-14)
In step S105-9-14, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving counter in the main RAM 103 to "100". This means that a time-saving game state of "100" spins will start from the next spin. After setting the time-saving counter in the main RAM 103 to "100", the process moves to step S105-9-15.

(Step S105-9-15)
In step S105-9-15, the main CPU 101 sets the game state command (time-saving) in the command transmission area in order to send a game state specification command (time-saving) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that the game is in a time-saving game state. After setting the game state specification command (time-saving), the process moves to step S105-9-16.

(Step S105-9-16)
In step S105-9-16, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103 to indicate that it is stopped. After setting the value "0" in the special symbol status flag storage area to indicate that it is stopped, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-9-17)
In step S105-9-17, the main CPU 101 sets the game state to the normal game state. Therefore, in this process, it sets "0" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. After setting "0" in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process moves to step S105-9-18.

(Step S105-9-18)
In step S105-9-18, the main CPU 101 sets the game state specification command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to send a game state specification command (normal) to the performance control board 200 to indicate that it is in a normal game state. After setting the game state specification command (normal), the process moves on to step S105-9-19.

(Step S105-9-19)
In step S105-9-19, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" to indicate that the system is stopped in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. After setting the value "0" to indicate that the system is stopped in the special symbol status flag storage area, the process moves to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

Next, the control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the performance control board 200 will be explained.

(Regarding the control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201)
The control program shown in the flowcharts in Figures 26 to 29 is stored in the sub-ROM 202. The sub-CPU 201 reads the control program from the sub-ROM 202 and executes the control process according to the read control program. First, the main processing of the performance control board in Figure 26 will be explained.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 is experiencing a power outage (blackout). If it is, the process in step S200 is repeated; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S201. If the machine is experiencing a power outage, the process can be executed using a backup power supply (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub-CPU 201 performs an initial setup process to initialize the values of internally located registers, etc. During this process, an initial screen (for example, a color bar image) is displayed on the image display device 26. This initial screen continues until a power-related information command is received in the main command reception process. After the initial setup process is completed, the process moves to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub-CPU 201 performs CTC settings. Specifically, it sets up a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) which has functions such as creating pulse outputs at a fixed period and measuring time, and sets the CTC's time constant register so that the timer interrupt processing for the performance control board, described later, is performed periodically every 4ms. After performing the CTC settings, the process moves to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub-CPU 201 disables the interrupt for the performance control board timer interrupt process, which is executed periodically by interrupting the main processing of the performance control board. After disabling the interrupt, the process moves to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub-CPU 201 updates the random numbers used for the animation. Once the random number update process is complete, the process moves on to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub-CPU 201 enables the interrupt for the performance control board timer interrupt process, which is executed periodically by interrupting the main processing of the performance control board. After enabling the interrupt, the process returns to step S203, and thereafter, steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding timer interrupt processing on the performance control board)
Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing performed on the performance control board 200. This processing is performed by periodically interrupting the main performance control board processing described above (for example, every 4ms).

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub-CPU 201 saves the contents of the registers to the stack area. After saving the contents of the registers to the stack area, the process moves to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process to update the timer managed by the performance control board 200. After updating the timer, the process moves on to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub-CPU 201 performs input processing for the control device. For example, it performs processing according to the input of the performance button detection SW14a, the performance lever detection SW15a, and the directional key detection SW16a. After completing the input processing for the control device, the process moves to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub-CPU 201 executes the main command reception process shown in Figures 28 and 29. This process will be described in detail later using Figures 28 and 29. After completing the main command reception process, the process moves on to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub-CPU 201 executes the process of sending a subcommand. A subcommand is a command set in the main command reception process shown in Figures 28 and 29, which will be described later. In this process, the subcommand is sent to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Upon receiving the subcommand, the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c control the display, sound, light emission, and drive effects corresponding to the subcommand. After sending the subcommand, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub-CPU 201 executes a performance status monitoring process. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 58. After the performance status monitoring process is completed, the process moves on to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub-CPU 201 restores the contents that were saved in the stack area in step S300 to the registers. After restoring the contents saved in the stack area to the registers, the performance control board timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Regarding the main command reception process)
Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the main command reception process 1/2 performed on the performance control board 200 (a subroutine for step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S303-1)
In step S303-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a power-related information command. Power-related information commands include the power-on specification command and the power-restore specification command mentioned above. If a power-related information command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S303-4.

(Step S303-2)
In step S303-2, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing for power-related information commands. For example, if it receives a power-on command, it performs processing related to power-on specification (for example, processing to display a screen such as "RAM clearing"), and if it receives a power-recovery command, it performs processing related to power-recovery specification (for example, processing to display a screen such as "Recovering"). After completing these processes, it proceeds to step S303-3.

(Step S303-3)
In step S303-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets power-related subcommands in the subcommand transmission area in order to send power-related subcommands to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-4)
In step S303-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received an error-related information command. Examples of error-related information commands include the magnetic anomaly error specification command and the radio wave anomaly error specification command mentioned above. If an error-related information command is received, the process proceeds to step S303-5; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S303-7.

(Step S303-5)
In step S303-5, the sub-CPU 201 executes error-related information command reception processing. For example, if it receives a command to specify a magnetic anomaly error, it performs processing to notify the magnetic anomaly error, and if it receives a command to specify a radio wave anomaly error, it performs processing to notify the radio wave anomaly error. After completing these processes, it proceeds to step S303-6.

(Step S303-6)
In step S303-6, the sub-CPU 201 sets error-related subcommands in the sub-command transmission area in order to send them to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-7)
In step S303-7, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a start gate-related information command. Start gate-related information commands include the first start gate entry designation command and the special symbol memory designation command mentioned above. If a start gate-related information command is received, the process moves to step S303-8; otherwise, the process moves to step S303-11.

(Step S303-8)
In step S303-8, the sub-CPU 201 executes the icon change animation determination process. Specifically, when it receives the command to specify entry into the first start gate, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the information of the judgment result of the entry judgment process included in the command and determines the display manner of the variable icon and the reserved icon (the color of the variable icon and the reserved icon as described in the "reserved pre-read animation" described later). In this embodiment, since there are no "first memory area" to "fourth memory area" corresponding to the second start gate 22, the reserved icon corresponding to the second start gate 22 is not displayed, and naturally the "reserved pre-read animation" is not executed. Also, since the variable icon is not displayed during the time-saving game state, the "(reserved pre-read animation for the icon)" is naturally not executed. Therefore, the icon change animation is an animation that is executed exclusively in response to entry into the first start gate 21. After completing this process, the process moves to step S303-9.

(Step S303-9)
In step S303-9, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process to determine the change in the starting gate light-emitting device's display. The light-emitting color of the starting gate light-emitting device is linked to the color of the hold icon determined in step S303-8. For example, if it is determined in step S303-8 that the color of the hold icon should be blue when a ball enters the starting gate, the starting gate light-emitting device 21a will also emit blue light. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S303-10.

(Step S303-10)
In step S303-10, the sub-CPU 201 sets the start-gate related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to send the start-gate related subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-11)
In step S303-11, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a game state-related information command. Game state-related information commands include the game state specification command (normal) and the game state specification command (time-saving). If a game state-related information command is received, the process moves to step S303-12; otherwise, the process moves to step S303-14.

(Step S303-12)
In step S303-12, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing for receiving game state-related information commands. For example, when it receives a game state specification command (normal), it performs processing related to the normal game state (for example, processing to display a screen corresponding to the normal game state), and when it receives a game state specification command (time-saving), it performs processing related to the time-saving game state (for example, processing to display a screen corresponding to the normal game state, processing to light up the right-hand indicator 29c, etc.). After completing these processes, it proceeds to step S303-13.

(Step S303-13)
In step S303-13, the sub-CPU 201 sets game state-related subcommands in the sub-command transmission area in order to send them to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the main command reception process 2/2 performed on the performance control board 200 (the subroutine for step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S303-14)
In step S303-14, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a command to specify the performance symbols. If it has received a command to specify the performance symbols, it proceeds to step S303-15; otherwise, it proceeds to step S303-17.

(Step S303-15)
In step S303-15, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing for receiving a performance symbol specification command. For example, if it receives a performance symbol specification command specifying special symbol A, it determines a combination of symbols from "111" to "888" as the decorative symbols. If it receives a performance symbol specification command specifying special symbol B, it determines a combination of symbols from "111" to "666" and "888" as the decorative symbols. After completing this processing, it proceeds to step S303-16.

(Step S303-16)
In step S303-16, the sub-CPU 201 sets the performance pattern subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to send the performance pattern subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-17)
In step S303-17, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a minor win designation command. If it has received a minor win designation command, it proceeds to step S303-18; otherwise, it proceeds to step S303-20.

(Step S303-18)
In step S303-18, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process to determine the winning decorative symbols. For example, based on a predetermined distribution value, it determines one of the following combinations of symbols: "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", or "888". Once the winning decorative symbols are determined, the process moves on to step S303-19.

(Step S303-19)
In step S303-19, the sub-CPU 201 sets the small win decorative symbol subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the small win decorative symbol subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-20)
In step S303-20, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a special symbol variation pattern specification command. If it has received a special symbol variation pattern specification command, it proceeds to step S303-21; otherwise, it proceeds to step S303-26.

(Step S303-21)
In step S303-21, the sub-CPU 201 executes a variable animation pattern determination process. Specifically, it determines a variable animation pattern corresponding to a specified special symbol variable pattern from a variable animation pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 202. The variable animation pattern determination table associates one or more variable animation patterns with one special symbol variable pattern. For example, for "Variation Pattern 2""NormalVariation" (7S), there is one corresponding variable animation pattern (7S), and for "Variation Pattern 4""Super Reach 1" (40S), there are multiple corresponding variable animation patterns (40S). When "Variation Pattern 4" is received, one of the multiple available variable animation patterns is determined. Since each of the multiple available variable animation patterns has a different animation, multiple animations can be performed for one variable pattern. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S303-22.

(Step S303-22)
In step S303-22, the sub-CPU 201 executes an icon change animation update process. The icon change animation update process updates the color of the icon determined in step S303-8 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue → yellow, then in this process, it is decided to change it to yellow. In other words, the icon may change color each time a game is played. After this process is completed, the process moves on to step S303-23.

(Step S303-23)
In step S303-23, the sub-CPU 201 executes a process to update the starting port light-emitting device's color change effect. This process is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S303-22. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S303-22, the starting port light-emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S303-24.

(Step S303-24)
In step S303-24, the sub-CPU 201 executes the process for determining the jackpot announcement animation. Specifically, it determines the jackpot announcement animation to be performed in the symbol variation game from the jackpot announcement animation determination table (see Figures 30 to 36) stored in the sub-ROM 202. Details of the announcement animation will be explained in Figures 30 to 36. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S303-25.

(Step S303-25)
In step S303-25, the sub-CPU 201 sets the variable pattern-related subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to transmit the variable pattern subcommand (for example, the information determined in steps S303-21 to S303-24) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-26)
In step S303-26, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received a special symbol confirmation command. If it has received a special symbol confirmation command, it proceeds to step S303-27; otherwise, it proceeds to step S303-29.

(Step S303-27)
In step S303-27, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing upon receiving a special symbol confirmation command. Specifically, it executes processing to confirm and display the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, the right decorative symbol 26c, and the fourth symbol 26d. After completing this processing, the process moves on to step S303-28. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 26a, the middle decorative symbol 26b, and the right decorative symbol 26c may be referred to as "decorative symbols" or "performance symbols."

(Step S303-28)
In step S303-28, the sub-CPU 201 sets the special symbol confirmation subcommand in the subcommand transmission area in order to send the special symbol confirmation subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process moves on to step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S303-29)
In step S303-29, the sub-CPU 201 executes processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, if it receives a command indicating that a setting value is being changed, a command indicating that a setting value is being checked, or a command indicating that the setting value has been checked, it executes processing corresponding to these received commands. After completing such processing, it proceeds to step S304 of the timer interrupt processing for the performance control board.

Next, an example of various effects that the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment can perform is described below.

(Predictive effect)
A pre-reading effect is an effect that is performed based on the result of a pre-determination process (for example, the entry determination process in Figure 15) that is performed prior to the special symbol win determination process in the special symbol variation start processing when a game ball enters the first start opening 21. If a pre-reading effect is not implemented, for example, when a game ball enters the first start opening 21, the determination information (random value) is acquired and stored, and then the special symbol win determination process is performed in the special symbol variation start processing. Therefore, even if the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth memory area," it will not be determined whether it is a special symbol win until the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "relevant variation memory area." Consequently, even if the determination information (random value) for a "special symbol win" is acquired, it will not be possible to perform effects that increase the expectation of a special symbol win before the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "relevant variation memory area." However, by incorporating a pre-announcement feature, for example, a "pre-determination process (winning determination process)" can be performed to determine whether it is a "special symbol win" or a "special symbol miss," and then a series of effects can be executed over multiple spins (including the spins that have been transferred to the "same spin memory area") until the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "same spin memory area." This makes it possible to increase the expectation of a "special symbol win" even before the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "same spin memory area."

A concrete example of the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is the "reserve pre-reading effect" (see step S303-8 in Figure 28). The "reserve pre-reading effect" is an effect that mainly uses the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o and the reserve icon displayed in the first reserve ball image display area 26g to the fourth reserve ball image display area 26j of the first start port. For example, when judgment information (random values) is stored up to the "third memory area" and a game ball enters the first start port 21, the judgment information (random values) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, if it is determined that the reserve pre-reading effect should be executed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, a pre-reading reserve icon different from the default normal color (white) reserve icon (normal icon) is displayed in the fourth reserve ball image display area 26j of the first start port. The pre-read hold icon can display multiple types and stages, such as "blue," "yellow," "green," "red," and "rainbow." If the pre-judgment result is "special symbol hit," one of "blue," "yellow," "green," "red," or "rainbow" can be displayed. If the pre-judgment result is "special symbol miss," one of "blue," "yellow," "green," or "red" can be displayed. Furthermore, "rainbow" is only selectable in the case of a "special symbol hit," and "red" is made easier to select in the case of a "special symbol hit," while "blue" is made easier to select in the case of a "special symbol miss," thereby increasing the expectation of a special symbol hit with "red." The relationship of the expectation of a special symbol hit, from highest to lowest, is rainbow > red > green > yellow > blue > normal. In this embodiment, this type of effect is sometimes referred to as a "hold change effect."

Another specific example of the above-mentioned pre-announcement effect is the "winning flash effect." The "winning flash effect" is an effect that increases the expectation of a special win by having a speaker lamp installed on the lower speaker 10 light up when a game ball enters the start opening, and continuing to light up until the start of the symbol variation game related to the ball entry, or until the execution of the symbol variation game related to the ball entry, or until the end of the symbol variation game related to the ball entry. For example, when judgment information (random values) is stored up to the "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first start opening 21, the judgment information (random values) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, if it is determined that the winning flash effect should be executed, a scenario for lighting the speaker lamp (a scenario with a defined light color) is selected, and the speaker lamp is lit based on the selected scenario. The speaker lamp's light color is arranged in order of increasing expectation of a special symbol win: red > green > blue. Similar to the aforementioned pre-announcement effect, it's possible to change the color to indicate the highest expectation of a special symbol win with each reel spin. It's also possible to output a winning sound corresponding to each color.

Another specific example of the above-mentioned pre-announcement effect is the "zone effect." The "zone effect" is an effect that mainly uses the image display device 26. For example, when judgment information (random values) is stored up to the "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first start opening 21, the judgment information (random values) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, if it is determined that the zone effect should be executed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, the image display device 26 will display an effect that encourages entry, such as "If the special symbols line up, you will enter the ○○ zone!", and then, after the special symbols are lined up and the player enters the "○○ zone," the "○○ zone" effect is executed until the variation in which the judgment information (random values) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "current variation memory area." During the execution of this "○○ zone" effect, the image display device 26 will display a caption such as "In the ○○ zone." Furthermore, the "zone effect" is more likely to be executed when the pre-determination process determines a "special symbol win," and less likely to be executed when it determines a "special symbol loss." Therefore, when it is executed, it can create a strong expectation that a special symbol win will be awarded.

Another specific example of the above-mentioned pre-announcement effect is the "consecutive chance symbol notification." The "consecutive chance symbol notification" is an effect that mainly uses the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c, which are displayed on the image display device 26. For example, when judgment information (random values) is stored up to the "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first start opening 21, the judgment information (random values) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-judgment process is executed. Then, if it is determined that the consecutive chance symbol effect should be executed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, for example, the combination of decorative symbol images of the same color is stopped in the confirmed display of the symbol variation game corresponding to the judgment information (random values) stored in the "first memory area," the confirmed display of the symbol variation game corresponding to the judgment information (random values) stored in the "second memory area," and the confirmed display of the symbol variation game corresponding to the judgment information (random values) stored in the "third memory area." For example, the decorative pattern images consist of "333" and "777" in red, "111" and "555" in green, and "222," "444," "666," and "888" in blue. By displaying multiple combinations of only red ("337" and "773"), only green ("115" and "551"), and only blue ("246" and "628") over several variations, the game creates an anticipation that a special win might be awarded in the subsequent pattern variation game. Furthermore, when a special win occurs, combinations of only red are more likely to appear, and when a special win is not achieved, combinations of only blue are more likely to appear, thus increasing the expectation of a special win when a combination of only red is displayed.

(Pseudo-consecutive win announcement)
A pseudo-consecutive win notification is a performance that mainly uses the left decorative symbol 26a, middle decorative symbol 26b, right decorative symbol 26c, and pseudo-consecutive win symbols displayed on the image display device 26. In a "single spin game," the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols is repeated to make it appear as if multiple spins have occurred (corresponding to spin patterns 6-8 and spin patterns 12-14). For example, as shown in Figure 7, pseudo-consecutive wins can be performed two or three times, and the more times it is performed, the higher the expectation of a special win. As for specific details of the presentation, for example, the left decorative symbol 26a temporarily displays "5", the right decorative symbol 26c temporarily displays "6", the middle decorative symbol 26b temporarily displays the "pseudo-consecutive symbol", then all decorative symbols are displayed in a changing display again (at this point, pseudo-consecutive is performed twice), then the left decorative symbol 26a temporarily displays "5", the right decorative symbol 26c temporarily displays "6", and the middle decorative symbol 26b temporarily displays the "pseudo-consecutive symbol". The game then displays all the decorative symbols in a rotating pattern again (at this point, there are three pseudo-consecutive wins). For example, if, during the second temporary stop display, "5" is displayed as the left decorative symbol 26a and "5" is displayed as the right decorative symbol 26c, there are two pseudo-consecutive wins. If, during the second temporary stop display, "5" is displayed as the left decorative symbol 26a and "6" is displayed as the right decorative symbol 26c, there are three pseudo-consecutive wins. In addition, it is possible to perform a so-called "pseudo-consecutive win after a reach," where a "pseudo-consecutive win exclusive symbol" is temporarily displayed as the middle decorative symbol 26b. It is also possible to perform an effect where, for example, at the start of the rotation after the first temporary stop display, the game announces that a "pseudo-consecutive win exclusive symbol" will be temporarily displayed as the middle decorative symbol 26b (symbol stop announcement), and at that point, it is confirmed that there will be three or more pseudo-consecutive wins.

Next, we will explain the jackpot notification effect. The jackpot notification effect (an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game) is determined in step S303-24 of Figure 29. For example, when a game ball is inserted into the second start port 22 during the time-saving game state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is executed regardless of whether it is a special symbol win, a special symbol miss, or a minor win (see Figure 7). Therefore, the jackpot notification effect will not be executed when a game ball is inserted into the second start port 22 during the time-saving game state. The jackpot notification effect referred to here is mainly the effect executed when a game ball is inserted into the first start port 21 during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, when a game ball is inserted into the second start port 22 during the shortened play time state, a jackpot announcement animation may be executed. However, since the variation time is 1 second, when a game ball is inserted into the second start port 22, a sound or audio announcement animation may be executed from the speaker 10. For example, if special symbol F is determined based on the ball insertion, a special sound may be output. This prevents the animation from becoming monotonous while still allowing the judgment result to be derived in a short time.

Figure 30 shows the予告決表1 (pre-reach announcement) table, which is used to determine the announcements (pre-reach announcements) that are executed in a symbol variation game from the start of variation until a reach is formed.
The table is stored in sub-ROM 202 and contains the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process, the variation performance pattern, the distribution, and the notification (content). Sub-CPU 201 refers to the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process and the determined variation performance pattern, and uses the extracted random value for notification determination to determine the notification (content).

If the result of the judgment is a special symbol miss, and the variation performance pattern is a shortened variation, then no warning will always be determined. If the variation performance pattern is a normal variation, then no warning will be determined 80% of the time, and a dialogue warning will be determined 20% of the time. If the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, then no warning will be determined 70% of the time, and a dialogue warning will be determined 30% of the time.
Furthermore, if the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 20% chance of no announcement, a 70% chance of a dialogue announcement, and a 10% chance of a button vibration announcement. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance of a dialogue announcement and a 20% chance of a button vibration announcement.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, there is a 30% chance of no announcement and a 70% chance of a dialogue announcement. If the variation performance pattern is a super reach 1, there is a 20% chance of no announcement, a 60% chance of a dialogue announcement and a 20% chance of a button vibration announcement.
Furthermore, if the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 70% chance of a dialogue予告 (dialogue予告) and a 30% chance of a button vibration予告 (button vibration予告). If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 60% chance of a dialogue予告 (dialogue予告) and a 40% chance of a button vibration予告 (button vibration予告).

The preview decision table 1 has the following characteristics:
The dialogue preview can be triggered even if a winning combination is not achieved. This helps to alleviate boredom and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.
Even when a Super Reach (special symbol miss or special symbol hit) is performed, it may be selected to have no prior announcement. This prevents players from being disappointed if a pre-reach announcement is not performed.
When a Super Reach (special symbol miss or special symbol hit) occurs, the pre-reach announcement is more likely to occur compared to when a shortened or normal spin occurs. This allows players to focus on the subsequent developments when a pre-reach announcement is made, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
The button vibration notification can be activated during Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, and Full Rotation). This allows players to know in advance that a Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, or Full Rotation) will occur when the button vibration notification is activated, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the dialogue notification is more likely to be executed, and the button vibration notification is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special symbol is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol is missed, the dialogue notification is more likely to be executed, and the button vibration notification is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special symbol is hit.
This allows the player's expectation of winning a special symbol when the button vibration notification is triggered to increase, and encourages them to play the game hoping that the button vibration notification will be triggered.

Figure 31 is a dialogue preview determination table used to determine the details of the dialogue preview. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 30.

If the result of the judgment is a special symbol miss, if the variation performance pattern is a normal variation, the dialogue (white) will always be determined; if the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, the dialogue (white) will be determined 90% of the time and the dialogue (red) will be determined 10% of the time; if the variation performance pattern is a super reach 1, the dialogue (white) will be determined 20% of the time, the dialogue (red) will be determined 50% of the time and the dialogue (red) 2 stage will be determined 30% of the time.
If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 20% chance that the dialogue (white) will be selected, a 40% chance that the dialogue (red) will be selected, and a 40% chance that the dialogue (red) will be selected in two stages.

If the result of the judgment is a special symbol win, and the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, there is a 50% chance that the dialogue (white) will be determined and a 50% chance that the dialogue (red) will be determined. If the variation performance pattern is a super reach 1, there is a 10% chance that the dialogue (white) will be determined, a 40% chance that the dialogue (red) will be determined and a 50% chance that the dialogue (red) 2 stage will be determined.
If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 10% chance that the dialogue (white) will be selected, a 30% chance that the dialogue (red) will be selected, and a 60% chance that the dialogue (red) will be selected in two stages. If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 40% chance that the dialogue (red) will be selected in two stages, and a 60% chance that the dialogue (rainbow) will be selected.

The dialogue preview determination table has the following characteristics:
For example, in a normal reach, if the special symbol is missed, the dialogue (white) is more likely to be executed, and the dialogue (red) is less likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol is hit, while the two-stage dialogue (red) is less likely to be executed.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol is missed, the dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are more likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol is hit, while the two-stage dialogue (red) is less likely to be executed.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping that the dialogue (in red) and, even more importantly, the two-stage dialogue (in red) will be executed.

The dialogue (white) can be displayed even during Super Reach or higher (excluding Full Reel Reach). This prevents players from becoming discouraged when the dialogue (white) appears.
The dialogue (in red) can be played when the game reaches a "reach" or higher (normal reach, super reach 1, and super reach 2). This allows players to anticipate that the appearance of the dialogue (in red) will result in a reach or higher (normal reach, super reach 1, and super reach 2), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
The two-stage red dialogue can be triggered during Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, and Full Rotation). This allows players to anticipate that the occurrence of the two-stage red dialogue will trigger a Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, or Full Rotation), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
The dialogue (rainbow) can only be executed during a full rotation reach. This allows the dialogue (rainbow) to be linked to the full rotation reach, enabling players to recognize in advance that a full rotation reach will occur.

Figure 32 is a button vibration notification determination table for determining the details of the button vibration notification. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 30.

If the result is a "special symbol miss," and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance of one 2-second vibration and a 10% chance of three 2-second vibrations. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance of one 2-second vibration and a 20% chance of three 2-second vibrations.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance of one 2-second vibration and a 30% chance of three 2-second vibrations. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance of one 2-second vibration and a 40% chance of three 2-second vibrations. If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 30% chance of one 2-second vibration and a 70% chance of three 2-second vibrations.

The button vibration notification determination table has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, it is more likely that one 2-second vibration will occur compared to when the special symbol is hit, while it is less likely that three 2-second vibrations will occur.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol is missed, it is more likely to result in one 2-second vibration compared to when the special symbol is hit, while it is less likely to result in three 2-second vibrations.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping that the game will perform three 2-second vibrations.

In a full-rotation reach, the probability of three 2-second vibrations occurring is higher than the probability of one 2-second vibration occurring. Therefore, when three 2-second vibrations occur, the player's anticipation level increases dramatically, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since the dialogue notification is executed by the image display device 26 and the button vibration notification is executed by the performance button 14, both may be executed simultaneously in a combined manner. This can dramatically increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Here, using Figures 37 and 38, we will explain the modes of dialogue announcements and button vibration announcements.
Figure 37 shows the form of a dialogue preview.
(a1) is a scene in which an image resembling the performance button 14 (a button image labeled "PUSH") is displayed in the center of the image display device 26 during the display of each decorative pattern 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern 26d. The image resembling the performance button 14 is displayed entirely in green, and the performance button LED also lights up in the corresponding green color to indicate that the performance button 14 is within the valid operating time. This prompts the player to operate the performance button 14. The button image is displayed at the same size during dialogue announcements, cut-in announcements, and judgments.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 14, a character and dialogue are displayed as shown in (a2). (a2) shows the white dialogue, where the character emits the dialogue image SE1 saying "Maybe it's a reach!?" during the display of each decorative symbol 26a-26c and the fourth symbol 26d. The white dialogue means that the background color of the speech bubble in the dialogue image SE1 is white, and the text is, for example, black. In addition, a dialogue sound effect 1 is output along with the display of the dialogue image SE1, audibly indicating that the white dialogue has been displayed.

Then, when the dialogue image SE1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds), the dialogue image SE1 may disappear, as shown in (a3), and subsequently, a reach may be formed as shown in (a4).

(b1) shows a scene where, during the display of each decorative pattern 26a-26c and the fourth pattern 26d, a button image (an image labeled "PUSH") resembling the performance button 14 is displayed in the center of the image display device 26. The button image is displayed entirely in green, and the performance button LED also lights up in the corresponding green, indicating that the performance button 14 is within the valid operating time. This prompts the player to operate the performance button 14. In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a button indicator sound (single tone) in conjunction with the display of the button image, suggesting that the button image has been displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 14, a character and dialogue are displayed as shown in (b2). (b2) shows the dialogue (red) form, where the character emits the dialogue image SE2 "Chance!" during the display of each decorative symbol 26a-26c and the fourth symbol 26d. The dialogue (red) refers to the dialogue image SE2 having a red background color and, for example, black text. Additionally, a dialogue sound effect 2 is output along with the display of the dialogue image SE2, audibly indicating that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

If the dialogue is displayed in red, the dialogue image SE2 will disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds). However, if the dialogue (red) is displayed in two stages, the behavior shown in (b3) will occur, and the dialogue image SE2, which was displayed starting from (b2), will remain displayed even after the predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, another character will then emit the dialogue image SE3 saying "It's hot!". In dialogue image SE3, the background color within the speech bubble is red, and the text is, for example, black. Additionally, dialogue sound effect 2 is output along with the display of dialogue image SE3, further indicating audibly that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying dialogue image SE3, dialogue images SE2 and SE3 are hidden, and a reach as shown in (b4) is formed. In other words, if the dialogue is red, the execution period is 2.5 seconds, and if there are two stages of red dialogue, the execution period is 5.5 seconds.

Thus, since the dialogue (white) and the dialogue (red) are displayed in clearly distinct visual ways, and the dialogue (red) and the two-stage red dialogue are also displayed in clearly distinct visual ways, it prevents confusion about which dialogue preview has been executed.

Furthermore, by outputting dialogue sound effect 1 along with the display of dialogue (white) and dialogue sound effect 2 along with the display of dialogue (red), it is possible to prevent difficulty in determining which dialogue preview has been executed, even from an auditory perspective.
Furthermore, since dialogue sound effect 1 corresponds to the dialogue (white) and dialogue sound effect 2 corresponds to the dialogue (red), it can be said that the dialogue sound effects output in the dialogue preview also indicate the level of expectation for a special feature win.

Furthermore, by having the display color of the button image correspond to the illumination color of the performance button's LED, it becomes easier to understand that the performance button 14 is currently active.

For dialogue (in white text), the background color is white and the text is black, but a black background color with white text is also acceptable.
In other words, using a standard color means using "white" for either the background color or the text.
Also, for dialogue (in red), the background color is red and the text is black, but a black background color and red text would also be acceptable.
In other words, using a specific color means using "red" for either the background color or the text.
Furthermore, the text of the dialogue can be either abstract (for example, "Maybe it's a reach!?") or specific (for example, "It's a reach!").

Figure 38 shows the mode of button vibration notification.
(a1) is a scene in which each of the decorative symbols 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d have started to change display, and the performance button 14 is not vibrating. At this time, the performance button LED is emitting white light.
(a2) is a scene that has occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since (a1) (for example, 1 second), and in this scene, the performance button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds. At this time as well, the performance button LED is emitting white light.
(b1) is the same scene as (a1), and (b2) is the scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from (b1) (for example, 1 second), in which the performance button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after an interval of 0.5 seconds the performance button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after an interval of 0.5 seconds the performance button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds. The lighting pattern of the performance button LED is the same as in (a1) and (a2).
In other words, (a1) and (a2) represent one vibration over two seconds, while (b1) and (b2) represent three vibrations over two seconds.
In this way, the vibrations are distinctly different, preventing situations where it is difficult to determine which button vibration notification has been triggered.

The button vibration notification was initially presented as a difference in the number of vibrations (e.g., one 2-second vibration, three 2-second vibrations), but it could also be a difference in vibration duration. For example, there could be a 2-second vibration and a 5-second vibration, with the 5-second vibration being less likely to be selected for a loss and more likely for a win than the 2-second vibration.

Figure 33 is the notification determination table 2, which is a table for determining the notifications (notifications during a reach) that are executed when a reach is formed in a symbol variation game. When a reach is formed, it is intended to be from the time when the left decorative symbol 26a and the right decorative symbol 26c are temporarily stopped (for example, 4↓4) until a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds).
The table is stored in sub-ROM 202 and contains the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process, the variation performance pattern, the distribution, and the notification (content). Sub-CPU 201 refers to the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process and the determined variation performance pattern, and uses the extracted random value for notification determination to determine the notification (content).

If the result of the judgment is a special symbol miss, and the variation performance pattern is a shortened variation, then no warning will always be determined; if the variation performance pattern is a normal variation, then no warning will always be determined; and if the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, then no warning will always be determined.
Furthermore, if the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 30% chance of no announcement, a 60% chance of a logo announcement, and a 10% chance of a car group announcement. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 35% chance of no announcement, a 60% chance of a logo announcement, and a 5% chance of a car group announcement.

If the result of the judgment is a special symbol win, and the variation performance pattern is a normal reach, then no prior announcement will always be determined. If the variation performance pattern is a super reach 1, then there is a 10% chance of no prior announcement, a 40% chance of a logo announcement, and a 60% chance of a car group announcement.
Furthermore, if the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 10% chance of no preview, a 55% chance of a logo preview, and a 35% chance of a car group preview. If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 40% chance of a logo preview and a 60% chance of a car group preview.

The preview decision table 2 has the following characteristics:
Both the logo preview and the car group preview can be performed during Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, and Full Rotation), but not during Normal Reach. This allows players to play while hoping that the logo preview or car group preview will be performed when a reach is formed.
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the no-preview and logo preview are more likely to occur compared to when the special symbol is hit, while the car group preview is less likely to occur.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special symbol is missed, the no-preview and logo preview are more likely to occur compared to when the special symbol is hit, while the car group preview is less likely to occur.
This allows the player's expectation of winning a special prize to increase when the car group notification is executed, and encourages them to play the game hoping that the car group notification will be executed.

Figure 34(a) is a logo announcement determination table for determining the details of the logo announcement, and Figure 34(b) is a car group announcement determination table for determining the details of the car group announcement. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 30.

The logo preview determination table works as follows: If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance of a Chance and a 10% chance of a Super Hot result. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 85% chance of a Chance and a 15% chance of a Super Hot result.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance of a Chance and a 30% chance of a Super Hot result. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance of a Chance and a 40% chance of a Super Hot result. If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 50% chance of a Chance and a 50% chance of a Super Hot result.

The logo preview decision table has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol misses, the chance is more likely to occur, while the super hot chance is less likely to occur, compared to when the special symbol hits.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol misses, the chance is more likely to occur, while the super hot chance is less likely to occur, compared to when the special symbol hits.
This allows players to play while hoping for a thrilling event to occur.

Comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Super Reach 1 is more likely to trigger a "chance" (a specific outcome in the game), while Super Reach 2 is more likely to trigger a "super hot" (another specific outcome). This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will occur later based on which logo予告 (pre-announcement) is triggered.

The car group prediction determination table works as follows: If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, the first car group is determined 80% of the time and the second car group is determined 20% of the time. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, the first car group is determined 70% of the time and the second car group is determined 30% of the time.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, the first car group is determined 60% of the time and the second car group is determined 40% of the time. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, the first car group is determined 50% of the time and the second car group is determined 50% of the time. If the variation animation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, the first car group is determined 40% of the time and the second car group is determined 60% of the time.

The car group prediction decision table has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the first group of cars is more likely to be executed, and the second group of cars is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special symbol is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol is missed, the first group of cars is more likely to be executed, and the second group of cars is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special symbol is hit.
This allows players to play the game while hoping that the second group of cars will be executed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, the first group of cars is more likely to be triggered by Super Reach 1, while the second group of cars is more likely to be triggered by Super Reach 2. This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will be triggered later based on which car group's予告 (preview/announcement) is performed first.

In a full-rotation reach, the second group of cars is more likely to occur than the first group of cars. Therefore, when the second group of cars is executed, the player's expectation of a special symbol win increases dramatically.

Here, we will explain the forms of logo announcements and vehicle group announcements using Figures 39 and 40.
Figure 39 shows the form of the logo announcement.
(a1) shows a scene where each decorative symbol 26a to 26c and the fourth symbol 26d are displaying in a variable state, and (a2) shows a scene where the left decorative symbol 26a and the right decorative symbol 26c have temporarily stopped displaying "4", forming a reach. The logo announcement is displayed above each decorative symbol 26a to 26c as soon as a reach is formed. For example, in (a2), a logo image log1 labeled "Chance" is displayed. This logo image log1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), then disappears, after which a Super Reach 1 or similar becomes possible.

(b1) is the same as (a1), and in (b2), a logo image log2 labeled "Super Hot" is displayed. This logo image log2 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds), then disappears, after which Super Reach 1 etc. becomes available.

In this way, the "Chance" and "Super Hot" logos are displayed in clearly different ways visually, preventing confusion about which logo notification was being executed.

Furthermore, since "Super Hot" indicates a higher probability of a special win than "Chance," you could, for example, display "Chance" in green and "Super Hot" in red. This allows you to suggest a higher probability of winning through both the text and the color.

Furthermore, the speaker 10 may output the word "Chance" along with the "Chance" display, or the speaker 10 may output the word "Super Hot" along with the "Super Hot" display. This allows the expectation of a special win to be conveyed not only visually but also aurally, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 40 shows the configuration of the vehicle group warning.
(a1) and (b1) show scenes in which each decorative pattern 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern 26d are displayed in a variable manner, while (a2) and (b2) show scenes in which the left decorative pattern 26a and the right decorative pattern 26c are temporarily stopped and the number "4" is displayed, forming a reach. Unlike the logo announcement, the car group announcement is performed in a manner in which images resembling multiple cars move from the right edge to the left edge of the image display device 26 after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reach was formed.

(a3) shows the display mode for the first car group, where multiple car group images (car1) constituting the first car group are displayed. (b3) shows the display mode for the second car group, where multiple car group images (car2) constituting the second car group are displayed. In both cases, the display of the car group images lasts approximately two seconds from start to finish. After the display of the car group images ends, Super Reach 1 and other functions become available.

In this way, the first and second car groups are displayed in clearly different visual ways, preventing confusion about which car group's warning has been issued.

Furthermore, the logo preview and the car group preview may both be determined in the first variation sequence, or only one of them may be determined.

Figure 35(a) is the予告決表3 (preview determination table 3), which is a table used to determine the previews (previews during super reach) that are executed during a super reach in a symbol variation game.
The table is stored in sub-ROM 202 and contains the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process, the variation performance pattern, the distribution, and the notification (content). Sub-CPU 201 refers to the judgment result of the special symbol win judgment process and the determined variation performance pattern, and uses the extracted random value for notification determination to determine the notification (content).

If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance of a white conversation and a 20% chance of a red conversation. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance of a white conversation and a 10% chance of a red conversation.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 60% chance of a white conversation and a 40% chance of a red conversation. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 50% chance of a white conversation and a 50% chance of a red conversation.

The preview decision table 3 has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the conversation (white) is more likely to occur compared to when the special symbol is hit, and the conversation (red) is less likely to occur.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if the special symbol is missed, the conversation (white) is more likely to occur compared to when the special symbol is hit, and the conversation (red) is less likely to occur.
This allows the player's expectation of winning a special prize to increase when the conversation (red) is performed, and encourages them to play the game hoping that the conversation (red) will be performed.

Figure 35(b) shows the予告 (preview) determination table 4, which is used to determine the previews (previews during super reach) that are executed during a super reach in a symbol variation game. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 35(a).

If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance of a green cut-in and a 10% chance of a red cut-in. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance of a green cut-in and a 10% chance of a red cut-in.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance of a green cut-in and a 30% chance of a red cut-in. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance of a green cut-in and a 40% chance of a red cut-in.

The announcement decision table 4 has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed compared to if the special symbol is hit, and the cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special symbol is missed, the cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol is hit, and the cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed.
This allows the player's expectation of winning a special symbol win to increase when the red cut-in is executed, and encourages them to play while hoping for the red cut-in to be executed. Furthermore, a rainbow cut-in may be included, which is only executable in the case of a special symbol win and definitively indicates that a jackpot game has been achieved.

Figure 36(c) shows the予告決表5 (preview determination table 5), which is used to determine the preview (judgment sequence) executed during a super reach in a symbol variation game. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 35(a).

The "Judgment" sequence is a sequence of events that occurs during a Super Reach to announce the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment process. It involves the player operating the action button 14 or the action lever 15 (or the operation validity period elapses if no operation is performed), informing the player whether the result is a special symbol win or a special symbol loss. A button image bg, resembling the action button 14, and an action lever image leg, resembling the action lever 15, are displayed immediately before the result is announced. Therefore, the display of these images alone is merely a preview; the entire sequence from the display of these images to the announcement of the result constitutes the Judgment sequence. In the following, it may simply be referred to as "Judgment."

If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, the animation button will be determined 80% of the time and the animation lever 20% of the time. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, the animation button will be determined 90% of the time and the animation lever 10% of the time.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, the animation button is determined 60% of the time and the animation lever is determined 40% of the time. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, the animation button is determined 50% of the time and the animation lever is determined 50% of the time.

Figure 36(d) is the performance button determination table for the judgment sequence. When the performance button is determined in the予告 (preview) determination table 5, this table further determines the display color of the button image and the illumination color of the performance button's LED.

If the result is a special symbol miss, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that the animation button (normal) will be selected, and a 10% chance that the animation button (red) will be selected. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 95% chance that the animation button (normal) will be selected, and a 5% chance that the animation button (red) will be selected. Note that the animation button (normal) is a presentation mode where both the button image color and the animation button LED light color are green, while the animation button (red) is a presentation mode where both the button image color and the animation button LED light color are red.

If the result is a special symbol win, and the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 45% chance that the animation button (normal) will be selected and a 55% chance that the animation button (red) will be selected. If the variation animation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 40% chance that the animation button (normal) will be selected and a 60% chance that the animation button (red) will be selected.

The preview determination table 5 and the performance button determination table have the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the effect button is more likely to be executed, and the effect lever is less likely to be executed, compared to when the special symbol is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special symbol fails to hit, the performance button is more likely to be pressed, while the performance lever is less likely to be pressed, compared to when the special symbol hits.
This increases the player's expectation of hitting a special symbol when the performance lever is activated, and encourages them to play while hoping that the performance lever will be activated.

For example, in Super Reach 1, if the special symbol is missed, the normal effect button is more likely to be executed, while the red effect button is less likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol is hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when the special symbol fails to hit, the normal effect button is more likely to be executed, while the red effect button is less likely to be executed compared to when the special symbol hits.
This allows the player to increase their expectation of hitting a special symbol win, even if the judgment animation is triggered by an animation button, and encourages them to play while hoping that the animation button (red) will be triggered.

Furthermore, the judgment sequence, which requires the user to operate the performance button 14 or performance lever 15, may be executed in either Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2, or in either one. If executed in only one, the other may simply notify the judgment result without requiring any user input.

Furthermore, during the judgment sequence, either the normal or red performance button can be pressed. During the dialogue and cut-in previews, only the normal performance button can be pressed; however, the red performance button may also be pressed during the dialogue and cut-in previews.

Figure 41 shows the form of the cut-in予告 (cut-in notification).
(a1) and (b1) show the scene when the game transitions to a Super Reach (for example, Super Reach 1), where each decorative symbol 26a to 26c moves to the upper right of the display area and is displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) and (b2) show scenes after a predetermined time has elapsed since transitioning to a Super Reach (e.g., Super Reach 1), where a button image (an image labeled "PUSH") is displayed in the center of the image display device 26. The button image is displayed entirely in green, and the performance button LED also lights up in the corresponding green, indicating that the performance button 14 is within its valid operating time. In the cut-in予告 (cut-in announcement), a button image bg, which mimics the performance button 14, is displayed. Neither the image displaying "Press!" nor the voice outputting "Press!" is present. Instead, the speaker 10 outputs a button display sound (single tone) that indicates the button image has been displayed. This button display sound is the same as the sound output during the dialogue announcement.

(a3) shows the display of a green cut-in, displaying cut-in image ci1 with the word "Chance" written in green letters. (b3) shows the display of a red cut-in, displaying cut-in image ci2 with the word "Chance" written in red letters. In both cases, the display of the cut-in image lasts for approximately 3 seconds, and shortly after the cut-in image finishes, the result of the special symbol win determination process is announced. In other words, the cut-in予告 (preview) is a preview effect that is executed immediately before the announcement of the determination result.

Thus, since the green and red cut-in previews are displayed in clearly different ways visually, it prevents confusion about which type of cut-in preview has been executed.

Figure 42 shows the judging process.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes from a conversation preview during a Super Reach (for example, Super Reach 2), where the enemy character chaB is displayed and a conversation image con4-1 saying "Let's go~" is displayed in white letters. Also, the sound "Let's go~" is output from speaker 10.

The conversation preview is a preview that occurs during a confrontation between ally character chaA and enemy character chaB. A conversation between ally character chaA and enemy character chaB takes place at the bottom center of the display area, and the color of the text in the conversation image con4-1 (e.g., white text, red text) indicates the possibility of a winning game being played.

(a2) and (b2) show the results of the special symbol win detection process. In (a2), a button image (an image labeled "PUSH") is displayed in the center of the image display device 26, and here the button image is displayed entirely in red. The performance button LED also lights up in the corresponding red color, prompting the user to operate the performance button 14. Meanwhile, in (b2), an image resembling the performance lever 15 is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, in (a2), the button image bg and the message "Press!" are displayed to prompt the user to press the performance button 14, and the voice prompt "Press!" is also output. On the other hand, in (b2), the lever image leg and the message "Pull!" are displayed to prompt the user to press the performance lever 15, and the voice prompt "Pull!" is also output.

Then, the result of the judgment is notified according to the elapsed time of the operation, or if (a2) the performance button 14 has been operated, or if (b2) the performance lever 15 has been operated.
For example, if the special symbol is hit, as shown in (a3) and (b3), the movable body 28 moves to the operating position (the movable body movement effect is executed), and each decorative symbol 26a to 26c temporarily stops at "444" in the upper right of the display area, indicating that the special symbol is hit. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not hit, although not shown, the movable body 28 does not move to the operating position (it remains at the origin position), and each decorative symbol 26a to 26c temporarily stops at "454" in the upper right of the display area, indicating that the special symbol is hit.

Next, Figures 43 to 45 will be used to explain the conversation preview in more detail.
Figures 43(a1) and 43(b1) show the transition to a Super Reach (for example, Super Reach 2), where each decorative symbol 26a to 26c moves to the upper right of the display area and is displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) shows the scene at the start of the conversation preview, where first, an image con1-1 of the conversation from the ally character chaA saying "Let's have a match" is displayed in white text. At the same time, the voice saying "Let's have a match" is output from speaker 10.
(b2) differs from (a2) only in that the conversation image con1-2, which says "Let's have a match," is displayed in red text. For convenience, the red text is written in bolder than the white text. The red text corresponds to the conversation (red) in Figure 35(a), and the white text corresponds to the conversation (white) in Figure 35(a).
In addition, in the dialogue preview, there is no difference in the expectation level of a special feature win based on sound (dialogue sound effect) as in the dialogue preview. For example, the voice saying "Let's do this" will be output, but the same voice will be output whether the text is white or red.

(a3) shows the continuation of the conversation preview, and in response to the conversation spoken by the ally character chaA in (a2), the conversation image con2-1 from the enemy character chaB saying "There's no chance of winning" is displayed in white text. In addition, the voice saying "There's no chance of winning" is output from speaker 10.
(b3) differs from (a3) only in that the conversation image con2-2, which says "There's no chance of winning," is displayed in red text.

(a4) shows the continuation of the conversation preview, and in response to the conversation spoken by the enemy character chaB in (a3), the conversation image con3-1 con, which says "I won't lose", is displayed in white text from the ally character chaA. In addition, the voice saying "I won't lose" is output from speaker 10.
(b4) differs from (a4) only in that the conversation image con3-2, which says "I won't lose," is displayed in red text.

Figure 44(a5) shows the continuation of the conversation preview, where, in response to the conversation spoken by the ally character chaA in (a4), the enemy character chaB says "Let's go~" and the conversation image con4-1 is displayed in white text. The speaker 10 also outputs the voice saying "Let's go~".
(b5) differs from (a5) only in that the conversation image con4-2, which says "Let's go~", is displayed in red text (red letters).
Note that (a5)(b5), (a6)(b6), and (a7)(b7) are the same scenes as in Figure 42, so their explanations will be omitted.

When the judgment result is announced in (a7) and (b7), in (a8), the ally character chaA is displayed again, and a dialogue image con5-1 saying "Your training has paid off" is displayed in white text. At the same time, the speaker 10 outputs the voice saying "Your training has paid off".
(b8) differs from (a8) only in that the conversation image con5-2, which says "Your training has paid off," is displayed in red text.

Figure 45(a9) shows the continuation of the conversation preview, where, in response to the conversation spoken by the ally character chaA in (a8), the enemy character chaB displays the conversation image con6-1 in white text, saying "Excellent..." Additionally, the speaker 10 outputs the voice saying "Excellent."
(b9) differs from (a9) only in that the conversation image con6-2, which says "magnificent," is displayed in red text.

The execution period from the start of the conversation announcement (a2)(b2) to the end of the conversation announcement (a9)(b9) is, for example, approximately 25 seconds.
In other words, the execution period is longer than that of the dialogue preview (red) (2.5 seconds) and the two-stage dialogue (red) (5.5 seconds).
This prevents the pre-reach dialogue announcements from becoming redundant and diminishing the enjoyment of the game, while the pre-judgment dialogue announcements can enhance the enjoyment of the game by building tension over a longer period regarding whether or not a win will occur.

Furthermore, in conversation-based pre-announcements where the expectation of a special win does not change based on the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed, there is no need to count the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed over a long period, allowing players to focus on the conversation pre-announcement. On the other hand, in dialogue-based pre-announcements where the expectation of a special win changes based on the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed, it is necessary to count the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed over a short period, thus allowing players to focus on the dialogue pre-announcement.

Then, in (a10) and (b10), each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is temporarily stopped and displayed as "444", the performance button 14 vibrates (executing the winning button vibration effect), and in (a11) and (b11), each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is confirmed and displayed as "444", and the vibration of the performance button 14 stops.
Also, similar to the vibration effect, the LED of the effect button lights up in rainbow colors at (a10) and (b10) (executing the button lighting effect when a win occurs), and the rainbow lighting of the effect button LED ends at (a11) and (b11).

In this dialogue preview, the ally character chaA and the enemy character chaB engage in a conversation, and the difference in the text color of the dialogue image indicates the likelihood of a special symbol win. Specifically, red text indicates a higher likelihood of a special symbol win than white text, so, similar to other previews (for example, dialogue previews and hold pre-announcement effects), a common understanding can be established that red indicates a higher likelihood of a win. This allows players to play while hoping for the display of red text.

Furthermore, after the judgment result (special symbol win) is announced in (a7) and (b7), the text color in (a8) and (b8), and (a9) and (b9) is maintained from the text color in (a7) and (b7). In other words, after (a7), the dialogue announcements in (a8) and (a9) continue to be displayed in white text, and after (b8), the dialogue announcements in (b8) and (b9) continue to be displayed in red text. This maintains a sense of unity until the confirmation display, allowing the player to transition to the jackpot game without feeling any discomfort. Also, since the entire dialogue announcement only needs to be the same color, the processing can be simplified, reducing the control load.

Furthermore, in the dialogue preview, the "white" text (white letters) may be displayed using only white, or, to improve visibility, the entire text may be white, but only the outline of the text may be black or another color.
Similarly, in conversation announcements, "red" text (red letters) may be displayed using only red, or the entire text may be red, but the outline of the text may be black or another color to improve visibility.
In any case, using a standard color means that some or all of the text in the dialogue preview is white, and using a specific color means that some or all of the text in the dialogue preview is red.

Figures 43 to 45 only illustrate cases where the special symbol is a hit, and do not illustrate cases where it is a miss. However, in the case of a miss, (a8) and (b8), and (a9) and (b9) should not be performed. Instead, (a7) and (b7) should be used to announce the miss, (a10) and (b10) should be used to temporarily stop and display the combination of losing symbols, and (a11) and (b11) should be used to confirm the combination of losing symbols. This prevents causing discomfort to the player, especially if the conversation announcement was performed in red text, as (b8) and (b9) would also be performed in red text.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not hit, the conversation announcements in (a8)(b8) and (a9)(b9) may be made. This makes it easier to recognize which text color was used for the conversation announcement even after the special symbol failure has been announced, and makes it easier to retrospectively check how high the expectation level of the announcement was.

Furthermore, (a8)(b8) and (a9)(b9) may be displayed uniformly in white text (white letters) when the conversation announcement is made. This allows the player to be entertained by the conversation announcement even after the judgment result is announced, while preventing them from developing false expectations (for example, the expectation that the reach will develop further).

Furthermore, if, for example, the dialogue preview in Figure 43(a2) is considered to be one instance, the number of dialogue previews can be arbitrarily determined. For example, it could consist of four dialogue previews, or six dialogue previews. It may also include one of these, or both. In any case, the execution period should be longer than the execution period of the two stages of dialogue (in red) in the dialogue preview (for example, 5.5 seconds).

Figure 46 is a simplified time chart (normal gameplay state) summarizing the aforementioned preview effects.
This time chart primarily explains the relationship between the expected value of a special feature win and differences in the preview effects.

When the change begins at timing T1, the dialogue announcement can be executed. In Case 1, the dialogue (red) upper (dialogue image SE1) is executed, and in Case 2, both the dialogue (red) upper (dialogue image SE1) and the dialogue (red) lower (dialogue image SE2) are executed.
In this case, the expectation of hitting the special feature is higher in Case 2, and when comparing the dialogue announcements using the dialogue (in red), it can be said that the more dialogues there are, the higher the expectation of hitting the special feature.

When a reach (normal reach) occurs at timing T2, the logo announcement can be executed. In Case 1, the chance (logo image log1) is executed once, and in Case 2, a pseudo-consecutive win (e.g., pseudo-consecutive win 3) is executed, and the chance (logo image log1) is executed three times.
In this case, if we compare the number of times the chance (logo image log1) is executed, excluding the number of pseudo-consecutive wins, the expectation of hitting the special symbol is the same in both Case 1 and Case 2. In other words, unlike the dialogue予告 (pre-announcement), the expectation of hitting the special symbol does not change depending on the number of times it is executed; whether the logo予告 is executed once or three times, the expectation of hitting the special symbol remains constant.

When a Super Reach occurs at timing T3, a conversation preview can be performed. In Case 1, a conversation preview consisting of four parts is performed: Conversation 1 (red) Ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) Enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) Ally (character), and Conversation 4 (red) Enemy (character). In Case 2, a conversation preview consisting of six parts is performed: Conversation 1 (red) Ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) Enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) Ally (character), Conversation 4 (red) Enemy (character), Conversation 5 (red) Ally (character), and Conversation 6 (red) Enemy (character).
In this case, the probability of hitting the special symbol is the same (unchanged) in both Case 1 and Case 2. In other words, unlike the dialogue予告 (preview) where the probability of hitting the special symbol changes depending on the number of times it is displayed, in the first type of preview, the dialogue preview, does have a probability of hitting the special symbol based on the difference in the color of the text, but it does not have a probability of hitting the special symbol based on the difference in the number of times it is displayed. For example, whether the dialogue (red) is displayed once or twice, the probability of hitting the special symbol remains constant, and whether it is displayed four times as in Case 1 or six times as in Case 2, the probability of hitting the special symbol remains constant.

When the timing for the judgment sequence reaches T4, the judgment sequence can be executed. In Case 1, the sequence button is executed during the judgment sequence, while in Case 2, the sequence lever is executed during the judgment sequence. In this case, the probability of a special symbol win is higher in Case 2.

At timing T5, when it is time to announce the judgment result in the judgment sequence, the judgment result is announced. If a special symbol win is announced in the judgment result announcement, a conversation予告 (conversation予告) can be executed (see Figures 44(a8)(b8) and 45(a9)(b9)). In Case 1, a conversation予告 consisting of two parts is executed: Conversation 1 (red) ally (character) and Conversation 2 (red) enemy (character). In Case 2, a conversation予告 consisting of four parts is executed: Conversation 1 (red) ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) ally (character), and Conversation 4 (red) enemy (character).
In this case, since the judgment result has already been announced at timing T5, the probability of hitting the special symbol is the same (unchanged) in both Case 1 and Case 2, and the probability of the time-saving game state being executed is also the same (unchanged). In other words, in this scene, whether the conversation予告 (red) is executed twice or four times, the probability of hitting the special symbol remains constant, and the probability of the time-saving game state being executed also remains constant. After that, the game stops with a confirmed result at timing T6.

Furthermore, when the hit result is announced at timing T5, the movable body movement effect (see Figure 44) and the special symbol hit button vibration effect (see Figure 45) are executed. However, these effects are executed when the special symbol hit result is announced, and the probability of their execution does not change depending on the number of times the dialogue (red) appears in the dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement). For example, whether the dialogue (red) is displayed once or twice, the probability of the effect being executed remains constant; whether it is displayed four times as in Case 1 or six times as in Case 2, the probability of the effect being executed remains constant. In other words, regardless of the number of times the dialogue (red) is executed (displayed), the probability of specific effects (e.g., movable body movement effect, special symbol hit button vibration effect) executed after the dialogue announcement ends remains constant. This eliminates the need to count the number of times the dialogue (red) is executed (displayed), allowing the player to concentrate on the dialogue announcement.

Thus, in this variation animation where "red" is executed in both dialogue and conversation animations, the expectation of a special symbol win changes depending on the number of times the dialogue animation is executed, while the expectation of a special symbol win does not change depending on the number of times the conversation animation is executed. In other words, during timings T1 and T2, the player's interest lies in whether or not a reach will occur, and the player is paying close attention to various animation sequences. In such a situation, by making the expectation of a special symbol win differ depending on the number of times the dialogue animation (red) is executed, it becomes easier for the player to predict the subsequent development (for example, whether or not a super reach will occur). The same principle applies to the button vibration animation that can be executed during this sequence.

On the other hand, at timings T3 to T4, the player's interest lies in whether or not they will win, and they are paying more attention to the "color" than the number of times the予告 (preview) is executed. In other words, in the case of a cut-in preview, they hope that "red" will be executed (displayed) rather than "green," and in the case of a conversation preview, they hope that "red" will be executed (displayed) rather than "white." This prevents the game from becoming confusing for the player, where the expectation of a special symbol win differs depending on the number of times the preview is executed, even before simply announcing whether or not it is a special symbol win.
In other words, by setting whether to prioritize the number of times the予告 (pre-announcement) is executed or the color of the pre-announcement depending on the situation (depending on what the player is paying attention to), it is possible to execute pre-announcements in a well-balanced manner throughout the entire variation performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the dialogue announcements performed at timings T1 to T2, a difference in the expectation level of a special symbol win was created based on the sound (dialogue sound effect) between the dialogue (white) and the dialogue (red). However, in the conversation announcements performed at timings T3 to T4, no difference in the expectation level of a special symbol win was created based on the sound (dialogue sound effect) between the white text and the red text.
This allows for the execution of appropriate sound effects for each scene. For example, in scenes where the focus is on whether or not a reach will occur (dialogue announcement), differences in the expectation of a special symbol win can be created through sound (differences in both display and sound), making the development after the reach more interesting.
On the other hand, in scenes where players are interested in whether or not they will win (dialogue announcements), by not creating differences in the expectation of winning the special symbol based on sound (only differences based on display), it is possible to prevent the addition of unnecessary information from disrupting the player's concentration.

Figure 47 shows an example of what happens during a special win in a normal game state.
Specifically, as shown in (a), at the start of the third round during a jackpot game, a message such as "Press the button to get RUSH!" is displayed. Then, as the third round progresses, as shown in (b), a fade-in effect (an effect that suggests the button image is about to be completed) is performed, and a countdown is displayed for the number of seconds until the button image is displayed and the effect button 14 becomes operable ("3! 2!..." in the diagram).

Subsequently, as shown in (c), the fade-in effect ends, and the button image (green), the operation validity time image YK indicating the remaining operation time, and the message "Press!" are displayed, prompting the player to operate the effect button 14. At this time, the effect button LED illuminates in the color corresponding to the button image (green) (green). Also, the speaker 10 outputs the voice message "Press!" along with the displayed message.

Then, when the player operates the performance button 14 (or after the operation is not performed), if special symbol A is displayed and the game proceeds to the first jackpot round, as shown in (d1), the movable body 28 drops and the message "GET!!" indicating that RUSH has been won is displayed. On the other hand, if special symbol B is displayed and the game proceeds to the first jackpot round, as shown in (d2), the movable body 28 does not drop, and an image resembling smoke and the message "Too bad..." indicating that RUSH was not won are displayed. In this way, when a special symbol win occurs during normal gameplay, a performance (jackpot judgment) is executed during the first jackpot round to indicate whether or not RUSH has been won. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous, merely involving getting game balls into the first jackpot entry point 24, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in some cases where special symbol A is determined, the combination of decorative symbols "777" may be displayed as a confirmation. In this case, along with the confirmation of "777," the acquisition of "RUSH" may be announced, and during the first round of the jackpot, a special movie or similar may be displayed instead of the usual announcement of whether or not RUSH has been acquired. This can further heighten the excitement of players who understand that "RUSH" has been acquired at the confirmation stage, thereby increasing their motivation to play.

Furthermore, it is possible that the acquisition of "RUSH" may be announced unexpectedly after (d2). For example, at the end of the fourth round, the movable body 28 could suddenly drop, announcing the acquisition of "RUSH." This would allow the player to maintain hope of acquiring "RUSH" until the very end, preventing a decrease in their motivation to play at the point of (d2).

Furthermore, the LED light color (and the color of the button image) of the performance button 14 may be used to indicate the likelihood of winning "RUSH." For example, when special symbol A is selected, the LED light color (and the color of the button image) may be made more likely to be selected as "red," and when special symbol B is selected, the LED light color (and the color of the button image) may be made more likely to be selected as "green," thereby indicating the likelihood of winning "RUSH." Alternatively, the color of the message displayed in Figure 47(a), whether "red" or "white," may also indicate the likelihood of winning "RUSH." This configuration allows players to grasp the likelihood of winning in stages, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a player performs a "left-handed shot" during the time-saving game mode and the ball enters the first starting gate 21, resulting in a special symbol win (special symbols A and B), the animation shown in Figure 47 will be executed. This ensures that even if the ball enters the first starting gate 21 during the time-saving game mode, the animation indicating whether or not to transition to the time-saving game mode will be executed, making it easier to satisfy the player.

Figure 48 shows a continuation of Figure 47(d1).
As shown in (d3), when the fourth round begins, a message such as "Press a button to select your preferred mode!" is displayed. After that, the screen switches to the one shown in (d4), and the effective time for the directional buttons 16 and the special effects buttons 14 is set.

The game has three modes: Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The cursor is switched using the left and right buttons on the directional pad 16, and the mode is confirmed by pressing the effect button 14. In example (d4), the square cursor is positioned in Mode A. Pressing the effect button 14 in this state confirms Mode A.

The term "mode" refers to the overall mode during RUSH mode, including the time-saving game state, the first big win game, and the minor win to big win game phases. Mode A is the mode in which "icon effects" are executed during the first big win game and the second big win game. Mode B is the mode in which "post-announcement" is executed during the first big win game and the second big win game. Mode C is the mode in which "battle announcement" is executed during the first big win game and the second big win game. The modes are described in detail in Figures 56 and 57.

Then, once the mode is determined, as shown in (d5), a message such as "Mode A Selected!" and only the Mode A icon are displayed. After the fourth round is completed, the game transitions to the ending, announcing the start of RUSH mode. Specifically, as shown in (d6), a message such as "RUSH Mode Started!" is displayed in the center of the screen, a "Right-Handed Shot Image" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the selected "Mode Image (Mode A in this case)" is displayed in the upper right corner. Additionally, a RUSH mode measurement image 26ti, indicating the time spent in RUSH mode, and a score image 26sc (in this case, "SCORE00600") corresponding to the number of balls acquired by entering the first and second large prize slots 24 and 32 during RUSH mode are displayed.

The measurement image 26ti during RUSH mode will be described later in Figures 59 and 60. The score image 26sc, corresponding to the number of balls acquired, displays the number of balls acquired during RUSH mode, specifically when a special symbol win occurs during normal gameplay and special symbol A is determined, by entering the first large prize slot 24 and the second large prize slot 32 (the number of prize balls is counted and stored in the sub-RAM 203 counter, and the counter value is displayed as the score image 26sc). For example, 10 balls can be entered into the first large prize slot 24 per round, and 15 prize balls are acquired for each ball entered, resulting in 150 balls per round. For 4 rounds, this is displayed as "SCORE00600" in Figure 48(d6).

The score image 26sc can display up to 5 digits, with a maximum display of "99999". For example, if the display shows "99000" and a second jackpot game is played, the display will not change to "100500" but will stop at "99999". Similarly, if the display shows "99999" and a second jackpot game is played, the display will remain at "99999". The counter value of sub-RAM 203 behaves similarly.

Note that if 11 game balls enter the main prize slot in one round, the prize balls corresponding to the 11th ball (15) are not added, but they may be added. Also, balls entering the starting prize slot or the regular prize slot are not added, but they may be added.

Furthermore, score image 26sc is displayed during minor wins, major wins (2nd round) and major wins (1st round) in RUSH mode, but not during the time-saving mode. This makes it easier to understand that the displayed information pertains to the number of balls won by entering the major prize slot. Of course, it is also possible to display it during the time-saving mode.

Figure 49 shows the details of the gameplay during the mini-win and big win 2 rounds when Mode A is selected.
In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 does not announce whether RUSH will continue or not when displaying the confirmation of a symbol variation game in the time-saving game state, but rather announces whether RUSH will continue or not during the big win game after the confirmation display. However, in the case of a special symbol win (special symbol D), the continuation of RUSH may be announced at the time of confirmation display. Furthermore, when the continuation of RUSH is announced at the time of confirmation display in the case of a special symbol win (special symbol D), the icon effect corresponding to mode A may or may not be executed during the execution of the big win 1 game.

Figure 49(a) shows the details of the game from minor win to major win 2 (continuation notification in the 9th round).
In the first round, the game is in a minor win state, and the main effects that are performed include "Aim for the V!" which encourages players to put the game ball into a specific area of the second large prize slot 32, the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti, and the update display of the score image 26sc. On the other hand, the icon effects exclusive to Mode A have not yet been performed, and even if a game ball enters the second large prize slot 32, the prize entry emphasis effect that notifies the player that the game ball has entered is not performed.

Figure 50(a) shows the display mode of the image display device 26 for the first round. It displays a Round 1 image indicating the first round, a Mode A image indicating the selected mode, a RUSH measurement image 26ti (currently being updated), and a score image 26sc (currently being updated). In addition, the phrase "Aim for V!" is displayed in a larger size than these images, and the speaker 10 also outputs the phrase "Aim for V!". Above "Aim for V!", an image showing a percentage (%) scrolls vertically, indicating the initial percentage that will be displayed.

Furthermore, if you shoot to the right without delay after "Aim for V!" is displayed, you can easily get the game ball into a specific area of the second large prize pocket 32, making it easy for even inexperienced players to transition from the minor win game to the big win 2 game. Once the game ball enters the specific area, as shown in Figure 50(b), "Aim for V!" disappears, and instead "V Acquired!" (an image suggesting a transition to the big win 2 game) is displayed. At this point, since it is still the first round, the icon animation has not yet been executed, and the image showing the percentage continues to scroll.

After a game ball enters a specific area, the game transitions to the second round (Big Win 2 game), and the state remains Big Win 2 game until the tenth round. Icon effects and winning emphasis effects begin from the second round onwards. These effects continue until the end of the eighth round. Furthermore, the update display of the measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc during RUSH mode continues. From the second round onwards, the percentage display in the icon effect indicates the continuation of RUSH mode. At the beginning of the second round, the scrolling percentage display stops, and the initial percentage is displayed. For example, in the example in Figure 50(c), 30% is displayed as the initial percentage.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 50(d), the percentage display moves to the left side of the display area, reducing in size, and is displayed as a continuation suggestion image 26ks below the RUSH measurement image 26ti. Along with the movement of the percentage display, an icon animation image 26ai is displayed at the bottom of the display area. The icon animation image 26ai is displayed using the entire left-right area at the bottom of the display area, and displays a target image (indicated by ◎ in the figure) located at the left end, followed by multiple images with numbers (number images). The number images (hereinafter also referred to as icons) move one position to the left when a game ball is entered into the first large prize slot 24. For example, in the second round, when the first ball is entered into the first large prize slot 24, the number image marked "1" moves towards the target image and disappears when it overlaps with the target image. Furthermore, the number images labeled "2," "3," "4," and "5" also move to the left, and a new number image labeled "6" appears from the right side of the display area. Subsequently, when the second ball enters the first large prize slot 24, the number image labeled "2" moves towards the target image, disappears when it overlaps with the target image, and the number images labeled "3," "4," "5," and "6" also move to the left, with a new number image labeled "7" appearing from the right side of the display area.

Since 10 balls can enter per round, the displayed number image for each round ranges from "1" to "10". However, if the 10th and 11th balls flow down consecutively into the main prize slot, the 11th ball may also enter (a so-called "over-entry"). In this case, the number image representing an over-entry is not displayed.

At the start of the second round, the numbers 1 through 5 are displayed as visible images, while numbers 6 through 10 are not visible. Numbers 6 through 10 slide to the left and become visible sequentially as balls enter the large prize slots corresponding to numbers 1 through 5.

Following the number image labeled "10" corresponding to the 10th ball being hit (to the right), from rounds 2 through 7, the number image for the next round is displayed. For example, when the number image labeled "10" overlaps with the target image, the number images labeled "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5" for the next round are displayed. On the other hand, in round 8, no number image is displayed to the right of the number image labeled "10," suggesting the end of the icon animation.

When a numerical image overlaps with the target image and disappears, an effect image may appear, and the percentage display may be increased. The expected increase rate differs depending on the type of icon that makes up the numerical image. The icon types will be discussed later, but for example, displaying a "green" icon results in a higher expected increase rate than displaying a "white" icon. In the example in Figure 50(d), for convenience, the "white" icon is shown as a circle (with the numbers 1-4), and the "green" icon is shown as a diamond (with the number 5).

Although simplified in Figure 50(e), the timeline is as follows: when the diamond-shaped number image (number 5) moves to the target image, the effect image "GOOD" is displayed in front of the target image. After the "GOOD" effect image is displayed, "+5%" indicating the added value is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the "+5%" image moves to the continuation suggestion image 26ks (overlapping with it), and the value of the continuation suggestion image 26ks is updated. Here, "5%" is added to the "30%" of the continuation suggestion image 26ks, updating it to "35%". Note that if the addition does not occur, for example, the number image may overlap with the target image and disappear, or an effect image with no text may be displayed, indicating that the addition did not occur.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first large prize slot 24, a prize-winning emphasis animation (an image showing "+15") is executed, separate from the icon animation, to notify the ball's entry into the large prize slot. Then, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the "+15" image moves to the score image 26sc (overlapping with it), and the value of the score image 26sc is updated. Here, "15 balls" is added to "SCORE00810" in the score image 26sc, updating it to "SCORE00825".

Furthermore, if no game ball is entered into the first large prize slot 24, the number image will not move, and the icon animation will be canceled. For example, as shown in Figure 50(d), even if a diamond shape (with the number 5) indicating a high probability of winning is displayed (even if it has been determined that an win will actually occur), if no game ball is entered into the first large prize slot 24, no win will occur. Also, if no game ball is entered into the first large prize slot 24, the number image will be replaced with one corresponding to the next round at the start of the next round. This prevents the icon animation from being executed incompletely, for example, if no game ball is entered in the third round and game balls are launched in the fourth round.

Furthermore, if no game balls are entered into the first major prize slot 24, and the number that was supposed to be added is not added, the percentage value at the end of the 8th round will be displayed as "TOTAL%" (Figure 50(f)). In other words, a value other than the final percentage shown in Figure 52(b) may be displayed. This prevents unnatural percentage corrections that might cause discomfort to the player.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 49, the 9th round involves a jackpot judgment. Figure 49(a) shows an example where a continuation notification is performed during the 9th round's jackpot judgment, so it is referred to as "continuation notification" here. Furthermore, even during the jackpot judgment, the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc continues. On the other hand, the icon effect and the winning highlight effect are not performed.

Figure 50(f) shows the display mode of the image display device 26 in the 9th round. At the beginning of the 9th round, it displays the final percentage of the icon animation that was performed from rounds 2 to 8. For example, it displays "TOTAL 90%", and then, after the initial percentage of "30%" is displayed in Figure 50(c), it notifies that the percentage has been updated to "90%" as a result of the addition. At this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are also updated and displayed. Note that there are multiple initial percentages depending on the expected continuation rate (described later in Figure 52).

Next, after the final percentage of the icon animation is cleared, a jackpot judgment is performed as shown in Figure 50(g). During the jackpot judgment, the player is prompted to operate the animation button 14 or the animation lever 15 (or, if no operation is performed, the operation validity period expires) to determine whether the RUSH continues or not. In the example in Figure 50(g), the animation button image (green), the operation validity period image YK, and a message such as "Press!" are displayed. Also, at this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are updated and displayed.

When the player performs an action, or when the effective time for the action has elapsed, the movable body 28 drops, as shown in Figure 50(h), to indicate that the RUSH mode is continuing. At this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are still being updated, but the continuation notification effects (such as the movable body 28 and the effect images around it) make them difficult to see.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 49, in the 10th round, the display "NEXT RUSH" appears, indicating that the game will transition to a time-saving mode after the completion of the two big win rounds. During this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are also updated. After the 10th round ends, the continuation ending (continuation ED) is executed. For example, the execution time of the continuation ED is 14 seconds. Note that the display patterns for the 10th round and the continuation ED are omitted from the illustration.

Next, Figure 49(b) shows the details of the minor win game to the big win 2 game (continuation notification in the ending). In other words, it shows an example where the continuation notification is not executed during the big win judgment in the 9th round, but is executed at the ending (ending ED). Note that the structure of rounds 1 through 8 is the same as in Figure 49(a), so the explanation is omitted.

Then, during the 9th round's jackpot judgment, a non-continuation notification is displayed. Figures 51(g) and 51(h) show the display of the non-continuation notification. As a result of the player operating the performance button 14, the movable body 28 does not fall, and an image resembling smoke and a message such as "Too bad..." are displayed. At this time, the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are also updated. Then, in the 10th round, the "NEXT RUSH" display is not shown, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc are updated.

Then, upon completion of the 10th round, the ending sequence (Ending ED) is executed. In this embodiment, when a continuation notification is given during the Ending ED, one of two types of revival animations is executed: "Revival at the Start of the ED" and "Revival during Result Display." "Revival at the Start of the ED" is executed as soon as the Ending ED begins, and the animation related to "Revival at the Start of the ED" is performed for approximately 14 seconds. On the other hand, "Revival during Result Display" is executed after the Ending ED begins, the result display is performed for 8 seconds, the continuation notification is executed at the 9-second mark, and the animation related to "Revival during Result Display" is performed for the following 6 seconds.

Figures 51(l) and 51(m) show the "Revival at ED Start" scenario. After the non-continuation notification is executed in Figure 51(h) and the 10th round ends, the game transitions to the ending ED shown in Figure 51(k). In the case of "Revival at ED Start," as soon as the game transitions to this ending ED, the movable body 28 drops, and the continuation notification is executed, making the display content in the ending ED difficult to see. Then, the movable body 28 returns to its original position, and the "NEXT RUSH" display, indicating a transition to a time-saving game state, is executed as shown in Figure 51(m). The above-mentioned execution of the "Revival at ED Start" sequence for approximately 14 seconds means that Figure 51(l) is executed for 4 seconds and Figure 51(m) is executed for 10 seconds.

Figures 51(k), (l), and (m) show the "Revival During Result Display" scenario. After the non-continuation notification is executed in Figure 51(h) and the 10th round ends, the game transitions to the ending ED shown in Figure 51(k). In the case of "Revival During Result Display," Figure 51(k) first displays the game results during RUSH. The game results consist of the RUSH measurement image 26ti (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), the score image 26sc (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), the win count image 26wi indicating the number of times a jackpot 1 or jackpot 2 was executed during the time-saving game state, the title image 26sg corresponding to the value shown in the score image 26sc, and the ally character chaA.

In the upper right corner of the display area, the RUSH measurement image 26ti (in this case, TIME 02:00) is displayed, directly below it, the score image 26sc (in this case, SCORE 02100) is displayed, and directly below that, the win count image 26wi (in this case, 1 win) is displayed. To the left of these, the ally character chaA is displayed, and at the bottom of the display area, the title image 26sg (in this case, Gacha Gacha Man of Revival) is displayed.

The RUSH measurement image (26ti), score image (26sc), and win count image (26wi) each use different fonts and colors, making them easily recognizable even when the three pieces of information are arranged vertically. Furthermore, by displaying these pieces of information close together, players can, for example, capture all three pieces of information in a single frame using their own camera equipment, thereby providing players with even greater satisfaction.

Details of title image 26sg will be discussed later, but here, "Revival Title 1" is displayed, suggesting that the RUSH continuation notification will be executed in a reversed manner. Then, after displaying Figure 51(k) for 8 seconds, the continuation notification shown in Figure 51(l) is executed, followed by Figure 51(m). The aforementioned statement that the "Revival during Result Display" animation will be executed for the next 6 seconds means that Figure 51(l) will be executed for 4 seconds, and Figure 51(m) for 2 seconds.

Next, Figure 49(c) shows the details of the minor win and major win 2 rounds (non-continuation notification). In other words, it shows an example where the continuation notification is not executed during the 9th round's major win judgment, and also not executed during the ending sequence (ending ED). Note that the structure of rounds 1 through 10 is the same as in Figure 49(b), so the explanation is omitted.

At the end of the game (ED), the results are displayed for 8 seconds. At the 9-second mark, the "NEXT Normal" display, indicating a transition to normal gameplay, begins, and this "NEXT Normal" display continues for the next 6 seconds. In other words, the timing at the 9-second mark, after the results display begins, is a branching point where either a revival during the results display or the "NEXT Normal" display will occur. Therefore, this timing is designed to draw attention to the player.

Figures 51(i) and 51(j) show the "non-continuing notification" mode. After the non-continuing notification is executed in Figure 51(h) and the 10th round ends, the display transitions to the ending ED shown in Figure 51(i). The display mode here is generally similar to Figure 51(k), but "Title 1" is displayed for title image 26sg, indicating that a RUSH continuation notification will not be executed. Then, after the display mode in Figure 51(i) is executed for 8 seconds, it switches to the display mode in Figure 51(j), and the "NEXT Normal" display begins.

Figures 49 to 51 above show the following expected effects.
When Mode A is selected, icon animations are performed from round 2 to round 8, and the continuation suggestion image 26ks can be updated according to the number of game balls that enter the first large prize slot 24. This adds value to the act of entering the large prize slot, which previously only yielded prize balls and had a rather tedious feel, making it more enjoyable to aim for the large prize slot.

Furthermore, icon animations and prize-winning emphasis animations are not performed in the first round. This prevents them from interfering with the "Aim for the V!" announcement in the first round. For example, players might be distracted by the icon animations and miss or mishear the "Aim for the V!" announcement, thus preventing them from forgetting to aim for the specific area. Also, by focusing on aiming for the specific area in the first round, it prevents the player from being unable to transition to the second round of the jackpot, thus preventing losses for the player.

Furthermore, icon animations and prize-winning highlight animations are not performed in the 9th round. This prevents them from interfering with the jackpot judgment performed in the 9th round; for example, players might be distracted by the icon animations and fail to operate the animation button 14 in time, thus preventing a lack of player satisfaction.

Furthermore, icon animations and prize highlighting animations are not executed in the 10th round. This allows for the same control as in the 9th round, preventing increased complexity in the control process. For example, if icon animations and prize highlighting animations were executed again in the 10th round, the control content would need to be changed from the 9th round, increasing the control burden; however, this is prevented. Additionally, players will not be given the impression that the icon animations and prize highlighting animations were interrupted, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game with a more cohesive presentation.

Furthermore, when an added value (e.g., +5%) is displayed in the icon animation, or when an added value (e.g., +15) is displayed in the winning highlight animation, the display is updated to move to the continuation suggestion image 26ks and the score image 26sc, respectively. This makes it easier to understand what the continuation suggestion image 26ks and the score image 26sc represent, providing a game machine that is easy for even unfamiliar players to understand.

Furthermore, even during "Aim for V!", icon animations, or jackpot judgments, it is now possible to update and display the RUSH measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc. This allows players to grasp the game status in real time, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
In Figure 49, the first round allows for the updating and display of the measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc during RUSH, but this can be disabled. This prevents players from becoming distracted by the updates and forgetting to enter specific areas. Similarly, in the ninth round, the updating and display of the measurement image 26ti and the score image 26sc during RUSH is enabled, but this can be disabled. This allows players to concentrate on judging during the jackpot.

Furthermore, regarding the initial percentage, it was only displayed as a scrolling indicator in the first round, and not explicitly shown in the second round. This prevents players from being distracted by the initial percentage being displayed in the first round and forgetting to aim for a specific area. Alternatively, the scrolling indicator and the animation related to the initial percentage could be omitted in the first round, and the initial percentage could be displayed at the beginning of the second round. This would allow players to concentrate on aiming for a specific area in the first round.

Furthermore, in the icon display, we have avoided showing number images that represent over-winning. This makes it easier for players to understand that the displayed number images correspond to balls entering the large prize slot, without causing them any confusion. This allows us to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand even for players unfamiliar with the game.

Furthermore, there are two possibilities for the continuation notification: one in the 9th round, and another at the end of the game (ED). In the case of the end of the game, there are also two additional options: a revival at the start of the ED and a revival during the results display. This allows for multiple timing points for the RUSH continuation notification, thus maintaining the enjoyment and anticipation.

Furthermore, after displaying "NEXT Normal" at the end of the game, the revival animation will no longer be executed. This prevents confusion among players.

Furthermore, whether the revival occurs at the start of the ending sequence or during the results display, the duration of the continuous notification due to the fall (and return) of the movable body 28 is the same (4 seconds). This eliminates the need to change the operation control of the movable body 28 between revivals at the start of the ending sequence and revivals during the results display. Therefore, while enhancing the enjoyment of the game through the presence of multiple revival effects, the operation control of the movable body 28 can be simplified.

Furthermore, the results display includes a measurement image 26ti (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds) during RUSH mode, a score image 26sc (up to the end of the previous 10 rounds), a win count image 26wi indicating the number of times a jackpot 1 or jackpot 2 was achieved during the time-saving game mode, and a title image 26sg corresponding to the value shown in the score image 26sc. This makes it easier for players to understand how much was won and over what period of time, thus providing a greater sense of satisfaction.

Next, Figures 52 to 54 will be used to explain the various tables related to icon animation. Figures 52 to 54 are tables stored in sub-ROM 202 and referenced when executing icon animations (tables used for executing icon animations).

Figure 52(a) is the initial percentage determination table, which is used to determine the initial percentage displayed in Figure 50(c). The initial percentages are "0%", "100%", "10%", "20%", "30%", "40%", and "50%", and the selection ratio of the percentage differs depending on special symbols D, F, and G.

Specifically, in the case of special symbol D, "0%" is selected 20/100 times, "100%" is selected 20/100 times, "10%" is selected 5/100 times, "20%" is selected 5/100 times, "30%" is selected 10/100 times, "40%" is selected 20/100 times, and "50%" is selected 20/100 times. In other words, in the case of special symbol D, "0%", "100%", "40%", and "50%" tend to be selected more frequently.

In the case of special symbol F, the selection is as follows: "0%" is selected at a rate of "10/100", "100%" at a rate of "10/100", "10%" at a rate of "5/100", "20%" at a rate of "5/100", "30%" at a rate of "20/100", "40%" at a rate of "25/100", and "50%" at a rate of "25/100". In other words, with special symbol F, "30%", "40%", and "50%" tend to be selected more frequently.

In the case of special symbol G, "0%" and "100%" are never selected. Instead, "10%" is selected at a rate of "30/100," "20%" at a rate of "30/100," "30%" at a rate of "20/100," "40%" at a rate of "10/100," and "50%" at a rate of "10/100." In other words, with special symbol G, "10%," "20%," and "30%" tend to be selected more frequently.

Special symbols D and F are special symbols that are designated to transition to a time-saving game state, and special symbol G is a special symbol that is designated to transition to a normal game state. Therefore, if "0%" or "100%" is displayed as the initial percentage, it effectively indicates that the RUSH mode will continue.
Figure 52(a) shows that, excluding "0%" and "100%", the higher the expected value of RUSH continuation, the more likely a higher percentage value is to be selected (displayed) as the initial percentage, and the lower the expected value of RUSH continuation, the more likely a lower percentage value is to be selected (displayed) as the initial percentage.
In this way, the initial percentage first indicates the expected probability of the RUSH continuing.

Note that while "0%" and "100%" essentially indicate a guaranteed continuation of RUSH mode, the game does not execute any animations that confirm the continuation of RUSH mode (for example, "RUSH mode confirmed!") when these values are displayed.

Figure 52(b) is the final percentage determination table, which determines the "TOTAL XX%" (see Figure 50(f)) displayed at the beginning of the 9th round. As mentioned above, if no game balls enter the first large prize slot 24, the percentage may not be added. In such cases, the "TOTAL XX%" displayed will not reach the determined final percentage. The final percentages are "77%", "100%", "60%", "70%", "80%", and "90%", and the selection ratio of these percentages differs depending on special symbols D, F, and G.

Specifically, in the case of special symbol D, the system selects "77%" at a rate of "30/100", "100%" at a rate of "30/100", "60%" at a rate of "5/100", "70%" at a rate of "5/100", "80%" at a rate of "15/100", and "90%" at a rate of "15/100". In other words, in the case of special symbol D, "77%" and "100%" tend to be selected more frequently.

In the case of special symbol F, the probability of selecting "77%" is 20/100, "100%" is 20/100, "60%" is 5/100, "70%" is 15/100, "80%" is 20/100, and "90%" is 20/100. In other words, with special symbol F, "77%", "100%", "80%", and "90%" tend to be selected more frequently.

In the case of special symbol G, "77%" and "100%" are never selected. Instead, "60%" is selected at a rate of "45/100," "70%" at a rate of "40/100," "80%" at a rate of "10/100," and "90%" at a rate of "5/100." In other words, with special symbol G, "60%" and "70%" tend to be selected more frequently.

Special symbols D and F are special symbols that are designated to transition to a time-saving game state, and special symbol G is a special symbol that is designated to transition to a normal game state. Therefore, if the final percentage displayed is "77%" or "100%", it effectively indicates that RUSH will continue.
Figure 52(b) shows that, excluding "0%" and "100%", the higher the expected value of RUSH continuation, the more likely a higher percentage value is to be selected (displayed) as the final percentage, and the lower the expected value of RUSH continuation, the more likely a lower percentage value is to be selected (displayed) as the final percentage.
In this way, the final percentage, following the initial percentage, indicates the likelihood of the RUSH mode continuing. Furthermore, if "100%" is selected as the initial percentage, "100%" will also be selected as the final percentage to avoid causing any confusion for the player.

Note that while "77%" and "100%" effectively indicate a guaranteed continuation of RUSH mode, the game does not execute any animations that confirm the continuation of RUSH mode (for example, "RUSH mode confirmed!") in conjunction with these displays.

Figure 52(c) is a percentage addition determination table, which determines the table for performing percentage addition by referring to the initial percentage determined in Figure 52(a) and the final percentage determined in Figure 52.
Specifically, if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "77%", "Table A" is determined; if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "100%", "Table B" is determined; if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "60%", "Table C" is determined; if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "70%", "Table D" is determined; if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "80%", "Table E" is determined; and if the initial percentage is "0%" and the final percentage is "90%", "Table F" is determined.

If the initial percentage is "100%", as mentioned above, the final percentage will also be "100%", so no table determination is performed at this point. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "77%", "Table G" is determined. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "100%", "Table F" is determined. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "60%", "Table H" is determined. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "70%", "Table C" is determined. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "80%", "Table D" is determined. If the initial percentage is "10%" and the final percentage is "90%", "Table E" is determined.

If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "77%", "Table I" is determined. If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "100%", "Table E" is determined. If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "60%", "Table J" is determined. If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "70%", "Table H" is determined. If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "80%", "Table C" is determined. If the initial percentage is "20%" and the final percentage is "90%", "Table D" is determined.

If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "77%", determine "Table K". If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "100%", determine "Table D". If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "60%", determine "Table L". If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "70%", determine "Table J". If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "80%", determine "Table H". If the initial percentage is "30%" and the final percentage is "90%", determine "Table C".

If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "77%", determine "Table M". If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "100%", determine "Table C". If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "60%", determine "Table N". If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "70%", determine "Table L". If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "80%", determine "Table J". If the initial percentage is "40%" and the final percentage is "90%", determine "Table H".

If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 77%, Table O is determined. If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 100%, Table H is determined. If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 60%, Table P is determined. If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 70%, Table N is determined. If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 80%, Table L is determined. If the initial percentage is 50% and the final percentage is 90%, Table J is determined.

Figure 53(e) is the percentage addition table, which defines the details of each table determined by the percentage addition determination table in Figure 52(c). Note that the percentage addition table contains 16 tables, from Table A to Table P, stored in sub-ROM 202. However, for the sake of explanation, only Tables A and P are shown in Figure 53(e), and the other tables are omitted.

The percentage addition table is a table in which the value to be added is determined for each of the 2nd to 8th rounds, and each table contains 16 different scenarios. From these 16 scenarios, one of the scenarios is selected using a predetermined random value.
For example, in Pattern 1 of Table A, the 2nd round is "+5", the 3rd round is "+5", the 4th round is "+10", the 5th round is "+10", the 6th round is "+20", the 7th round is "+20", and the 8th round is "+7". Also, in Pattern 2, the 2nd round is "+20", the 3rd round is "+20", the 4th round is "+20", the 5th round is "+10", the 6th round is "0 (no addition)", the 7th round is "+7", and the 8th round is "0 (no addition)". Also, in Pattern 3, the 2nd round is "+10", the 3rd round is "+20", the 4th round is "+20", the 5th round is "+20", the 6th round is "+7", the 7th round is "0 (no addition)", and the 8th round is "0 (no addition)". In other words, the sum of the added values in each pattern of Table A is "+77", and this is the table that is referenced when the initial percentage is determined to be "0%" and the final percentage to be "77%".

The "+7" that may be added in each pattern of Table A is a special addition value (a special addition value to achieve a final percentage of 77%) when "77%" is determined as the final percentage. In other words, no other table has "+7" defined, and effectively, the display of "+7" indicates a confirmed continuation of the RUSH.

Furthermore, in patterns 1 through 16 in Table A, no additions are made in rounds after "+7". For example, in pattern 1, "+7" is added in round 8; in pattern 2, "+7" is added in round 7 and becomes "0" in round 8; and in pattern 3, "+7" is added in round 6 and becomes "0" in rounds 7 and 8. The same applies to other patterns not shown; for example, if "+7" is added in round 3, rounds 4 through 8 will be "0". In other words, once 77% is displayed, it is not updated and overwritten by other values, and this tendency is also observed in Table B, which is designed to end at 100%. As a result of the additions, Table A will have multiple rounds that are 77% (for example, rounds 3 through 8), while Table B will have multiple rounds that are 100% (for example, rounds 3 through 8). In other words, including the initial percentage-based confirmation factors, there are actually multiple timings (rounds) (rounds 2-8) that suggest the continuation of RUSH is confirmed.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 5, when a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 22 during the time-saving game state, even if a special symbol win is not achieved, a minor win is possible with a "1/1" probability. If a minor win is achieved, and the player simply follows the instructions and shoots to the right, two major win games can be obtained. Therefore, this indicates a confirmed continuation of the RUSH, meaning the next major win game (mainly two major win games) is confirmed (a winning streak is confirmed). Thus, the icon display can be considered a display that suggests the possibility of a major win game being executed (a so-called one-game winning streak).

Furthermore, if subsequent rounds exist after reaching 77% or 100%, the icon animation will continue (but will not overwrite other values). However, it may be possible to have the icon animation end upon reaching 77% or 100%. This would effectively indicate that the continuation of RUSH is confirmed when the icon animation ends mid-round (before round 8), thus drawing attention to the animation's mid-round termination.

Furthermore, in pattern 254 of table P, the 2nd round is "+10", and rounds 3 through 8 are "0 (no addition)". In pattern 255, rounds 2 through 4 are "0 (no addition)", round 5 is "+10", and rounds 6 through 8 are "0 (no addition)". In pattern 256, rounds 2 through 3 are "0 (no addition)", round 4 is "+5", round 5 is "0 (no addition)", round 6 is "+5", and rounds 7 through 8 are "0 (no addition)". In other words, the sum of the added values in each pattern of table P is "+10", and this table is referenced when the initial percentage is determined to be "50%" and the final percentage to be "60%". In this way, 16 tables corresponding to the added values according to the initial and final percentages are stored, and each table contains 16 patterns of scenarios.

Figure 53(f) is a table for determining the icon type. The icon type refers to the type of icon related to the circular and diamond-shaped number images, as explained in Figure 50. The icon types include "white," "blue," "yellow," "green," "purple," "red," and "rainbow."

In Figure 53(f), the icon type for each round in the pattern determined in Figure 53(e) is determined, and the color of one of the 10 icons displayed per round is determined. The remaining 9 icons are automatically set to "white". For example, a format data set where all 10 icons are "white" could be used, and this data could be overwritten according to the color determined by the icon type and the position determined by the additive icon position (Figure 53(g)).

Specifically, if the percentage addition is "0", "90/100" selects "white", and "10/100" selects "blue". If "white" is selected, all 10 icons displayed per round will be "white". If "blue" is selected, one of the 10 icons displayed per round will be "blue", and the remaining 9 will be "white". In this case, the placement of the "blue" icon (which of the number images 1-10 it will be) will correspond, for example, to count 2 (the second ball entering the grand prize slot).

If the percentage addition is "+5", then "white" is selected at "5/100", "blue" at "10/100", "yellow" at "15/100", "green" at "20/100", "purple" at "30/100", and "red" at "20/100". In other words, when the addition is "+5", "green", "purple", and "red" tend to be selected more frequently. Furthermore, when addition is performed, the position of the icon (which of the number images 1 to 10 to use) is determined using Figure 53(g), which will be described later.

If the percentage addition is "+7", then "white" is selected at "2/100", "blue" at "2/100", "yellow" at "6/100", "green" at "10/100", "purple" at "30/100", and "red" at "50/100". In other words, when the percentage addition is "+7", "red" tends to be selected more frequently.

If the percentage addition is "+10", then "white" is selected at "5/100", "blue" at "10/100", "yellow" at "15/100", "green" at "20/100", "purple" at "25/100", and "red" at "25/100". In other words, when the percentage addition is "+10", "purple" and "red" tend to be selected more frequently.

If the percentage addition is "+20", then "White", "Blue", and "Yellow" will not be selected. Instead, "Green" will be selected at "25/100", "Purple" at "35/100", and "Red" at "40/100". In other words, when the percentage addition is "+20", the options are limited to "Green", "Purple", and "Red".

The "rainbow" icon is positioned as a special icon and can be displayed after reaching "77%" or "100%". For example, in pattern 3 of Figure 53(e), if the "white" icon is displayed for all 7 and 8 rounds, interest in the presentation will diminish. Therefore, displaying the "rainbow" icon in such situations suggests that the continuation of the RUSH is guaranteed. This makes the player almost certain that the RUSH will continue, preventing a decline in interest in the presentation.

Figure 53(g) is a table for determining the position of the addition icon (which of the number images 1 through 10 to be used). "Count 1" corresponds to the first ball being scored in a round, and "Count 10" corresponds to the tenth ball being scored in a round. Note that, regardless of the icon type, when performing addition, icons will never be placed at the "Count 1" or "Count 10" positions.

Specifically, when "White" is selected as the icon type, "Count 2" is selected with a probability of "15/100", "Count 3" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 4" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 5" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 6" with a probability of "10/100", "Count 7" with a probability of "10/100", "Count 8" with a probability of "10/100", and "Count 9" with a probability of "10/100".

If "Blue" is selected as the icon type, then "Count 2" will be selected with a probability of "15/100", "Count 3" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 4" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 5" with a probability of "15/100", "Count 6" with a probability of "10/100", "Count 7" with a probability of "10/100", "Count 8" with a probability of "10/100", and "Count 9" with a probability of "10/100".

If "Yellow" is selected as the icon type, then "Count 4" will be selected with a "40/100" probability, "Count 5" with a "40/100" probability, and "Count 6" with a "20/100" probability. "Count 1," "Count 10," "Count 2," "Count 3," and "Count 7" through "Count 9" will not be selected.

If "Green" is selected as the icon type, then "Count 4" will be selected with a "20/100" probability, "Count 5" with a "40/100" probability, and "Count 6" with a "40/100" probability. "Count 1," "Count 10," "Count 2," "Count 3," and "Count 7" through "Count 9" will not be selected.

If "Purple" is selected as the icon type, then "Count 5" will be selected with a probability of 20/100, "Count 6" with a probability of 20/100, "Count 7" with a probability of 20/100, "Count 8" with a probability of 20/100, and "Count 9" with a probability of 20/100. "Count 1," "Count 10," and "Count 2" through "Count 4" will not be selected.

If "Red" is selected as the icon type, then "Count 6" will be selected with a probability of "10/100", "Count 7" with a probability of "40/100", "Count 8" with a probability of "40/100", and "Count 9" with a probability of "10/100". "Count 1", "Count 10", and "Count 2" through "Count 5" will not be selected.

For example, if the percentage addition is "+20", the icon type is "red", and the position of the addition icon is "count 8", then an icon animation image 26ai (see Figure 50) such as "white, white, white, white, white, white, white, red, white, white" (with count 1 on the left) will be displayed.

Figure 52(d) is a table for determining the color display pattern (effect pattern) of the image display device 26, the light-emitting device 9, and the light-emitting pattern of the panel lighting device 29. In the icon display, the color display pattern of the image display device 26, etc., changes sequentially according to the updated percentage value.

Specifically, as the icon animation progresses, the continuation indication image 26ks will be displayed or illuminated in white when its value is between 0% and 19%, in blue when it is between 20% and 39%, in yellow when it is between 40% and 59%, in green when it is between 60% and 79%, in purple when it is between 80% and 89%, in red when it is between 90% and 99%, and in rainbow colors when it is at 100%.

As mentioned above, "77%" and "100%" essentially indicate a guaranteed continuation of RUSH, but they differ in that "77%" is displayed or illuminated in "green," while "100%" is displayed or illuminated in "rainbow." By uniformly displaying or illuminating "green" even at 77% (category 60% to 79%), the control processing related to display and illumination can be simplified. Furthermore, since "77%" has a lower visual confirmation factor compared to "100%" (it hasn't reached the upper limit of 100%), displaying or illuminating it in "green" reduces the sense of unease for the player. On the other hand, for "100%", which has a higher visual confirmation factor, displaying or illuminating it in "rainbow" makes the player's prediction of RUSH continuation more certain.

If no ball enters the first prize slot 24, the display or light should change to a color corresponding to the currently displayed percentage. For example, if the final percentage is displayed as 40%, the display or light should change to "yellow." This prevents the appearance of a discrepancy between the final percentage display and the display/light color, thus preventing any sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, while the final percentage display does not include correction (correction to the value determined as the final percentage), the display and illumination may be configured to correspond to the determined final percentage. Specifically, if the final percentage was determined to be 60%, but no balls entered the first prize slot 24, resulting in a display of 40% at the final percentage display timing, the display and illumination should be set to "green." This simplifies the control related to the display and illumination, as it only references the determined final percentage.

Figure 54(h) shows the icon change scenario table.
The icon change scenario table is a table that allows the number image corresponding to the icon to change gradually from the time it starts being displayed until it reaches the target image, with the icon type determined in Figure 53(f) as the final form. For example, if the icon type determined in Figure 53(f) is "blue", then a scenario in which "white" is displayed at the start of the number image display and changes to "blue" before reaching the target image is selected in "30/100", and a scenario in which the number image is displayed as "blue" from the beginning and does not change until it reaches the target image is selected in "70/100".

Furthermore, if the icon type determined in Figure 53(f) is "yellow," then the following scenarios are selected: 10/100: display "white" at the start of the number image display and change to "yellow" before reaching the target image; 20/100: display "blue" at the start of the number image display and change to "yellow" before reaching the target image; and 70/100: start displaying a "yellow" number image from the beginning and not changing until reaching the target image.

For the sake of explanation, other tables will be omitted, but tables corresponding to icon types "green," "purple," and "red" are stored, and the scenario is determined in the same manner as for "blue" and "yellow" as described above.

Figure 54(i) is the message table during addition.
The addition message table is a table used to determine the effect image (see Figure 50(e)) that will be displayed in front of the target image when an addition is performed. For example, when an addition of "+5" is performed, "GOOD" is selected as the effect image with a "100/100"probability; when an addition of "+7" is performed, "PERFECT" is selected as the effect image with a "100/100"probability; when an addition of "+10" is performed, "GREAT" is selected as the effect image with a "100/100"probability; and when an addition of "+20" is performed, "MARVELOUS" is selected as the effect image with a "100/100" probability. Note that the selection ratios are just examples; for example, in the case of "+5", "GOOD" is more likely to be selected, but other options may also be selected. The same applies to "+7", "+10", and "+20".

Figure 54(j) is the button decision table.
The button determination table is a table used to determine the type of button to press during the jackpot judgment performed in the 9th round. The button types are "button (green)", "button (red)", and "lever", and one of these button types is selected according to the final percentage in Figure 52(b). "Button (green)" is the mode in which the performance button 14 is operated and the LED of the performance button 14 and the performance button image are displayed in green, "button (red)" is the mode in which the performance button 14 is operated and the LED of the performance button 14 and the performance button image are displayed in red, and "lever" is the mode in which the performance lever 15 is operated and the lever image is displayed.

If the final percentage is "77%", select "Button (Green)" at "5/100", select "Button (Red)" at "15/100", and select "Lever" at "80/100".
If the final percentage is "100%", the "Lever" is set to "100/100" and no other options are selected.
If the final percentage is "60%", select "Button (Green)" at "80/100", select "Button (Red)" at "15/100", and select "Lever" at "5/100".
If the final percentage is "70%", select "Button (Green)" at "70/100", "Button (Red)" at "20/100", and "Lever" at "10/100".
If the final percentage is "80%", select "Button (Green)" at "60/100", "Button (Red)" at "25/100", and "Lever" at "15/100".
If the final percentage is "90%", select "Button (Green)" at "50/100", "Button (Red)" at "30/100", and "Lever" at "20/100".

In the button selection table, the "lever" button tends to be selected more frequently at 77% and 100%. At other percentages, the "effect button" tends to be selected more frequently than the "lever." Furthermore, at 60% and 70%, the "green button" tends to be selected more frequently than the "red button." At 80% and 90%, the "red button" tends to be selected more frequently than at 60% and 70%. Therefore, the expected continuation rate of RUSH is "green button" < "red button" < "lever," leading players to hope for the execution of either the "red button" or the "lever."

Figure 54(k) is the table for determining the performance when an over-winning combination occurs.
As mentioned above, the icon animation corresponding to over-winning will not be executed. On the other hand, an animation that notifies the player of over-winning is still possible, and when over-winning occurs, the voice "Yess

The table for determining the over-winning animation is referenced during either the first or second big win. In other words, it is not referenced during minor wins, and even if the 11th ball enters the second major winning slot 32 during a minor win, the over-winning animation will not be triggered.

The following effects can be expected from Figures 52 to 54 above.
In the initial percentage, it is possible to display percentages such as "0%" and "100%", which essentially suggest a guaranteed continuation. As a result, when "0%" is displayed, it gives the impression that the expectation of continuation is low at first glance, but since the RUSH continues in the end, it can add an element of surprise and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Also, when "0%" is displayed, depending on the final percentage, the number of additions will increase (the range of change in the value will also increase), so while enjoying the icon animation, the RUSH continues as a result, giving the player a great sense of satisfaction. On the other hand, when "100%" is displayed, although there is no addition through the icon animation, the visual image (the image that there is no upper limit above 100) and the sense of incongruity that the value does not change can give the impression that the continuation of RUSH is guaranteed, and as a result the RUSH continues, it gives the player a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, when displaying "0%" or "100%" in the initial percentage display, the animation confirming the continuation of RUSH (for example, "RUSH Continuation Confirmed!") is not executed. This prevents spoiling the outcome for players who are looking forward to the subsequent icon animations (preventing spoilers), allowing them to purely enjoy the icon animations.

Furthermore, for values other than "0%" and "100%", a higher initial percentage tends to indicate a higher probability of continuation, while a lower initial percentage tends to indicate a lower probability of continuation. This encourages players to display the highest possible initial percentage, and by providing indications of the expected probability based on the value, it makes the game easier to understand even for players unfamiliar with the game.

The final percentage display allows for the showing of percentages such as "77%" and "100%", which effectively indicate a guaranteed continuation. This draws attention to the specific value being added, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. For example, when the percentage is "10%", players can hope for a higher value to be added, and when it's "70%", they can hope for a lower value (e.g., +7%) rather than a higher value (e.g., +20%). This prevents the game from becoming monotonous, where only high values are desirable, thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the final percentage display, "77%" is only selectable when special symbols D and F (special symbols that can continue RUSH) are determined, while "80%" and "90%" are selectable even when special symbol G (special symbol that ends RUSH) is selected. Therefore, when "77%" is displayed, the expectation of RUSH continuation is higher than when "80%" or "90%" is displayed. In other words, when "77%" is displayed, the probability (expectation) of continuing with a minor win game followed by a major win game is higher. This prevents a simple rule where a higher final percentage equals a higher expectation, adding an element of surprise and further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when displaying "77%" or "100%" in the final percentage, the animation confirming the continuation of RUSH (for example, "RUSH continuation confirmed!") is not executed. This prevents spoiling the outcome for players who are looking forward to the subsequent jackpot judgment (preventing spoilers), allowing them to purely enjoy the jackpot judgment.

Furthermore, if the initial percentage is displayed as "100%", the final percentage will also remain "100%" (the initial percentage will not change). This prevents the initial percentage from being downgraded, thus preventing players from feeling uneasy.

Furthermore, for values other than "77%" and "100%", a higher final percentage tended to indicate a higher probability of continuation, while a lower final percentage tended to indicate a lower probability of continuation. This allows players to hope for the highest possible final percentage, while also providing indications of the expected probability based on the value, making the game easy to understand even for players unfamiliar with the game.

Furthermore, in the percentage addition process, when the final percentage is set to "77%", "+7" is designated as a special addition value to achieve "77%". This means that even though "+7" may seem like a small addition, its mere display effectively confirms the continuation of the RUSH, thus drawing attention to the displayed addition value.

Furthermore, in percentage addition, as shown in Figure 53(e), for example, once the percentage reaches "77%", no further additions are made, even if subsequent rounds remain (the same applies to 100%). This prevents the player from being disappointed by having values such as "77%" or "100%", which might indicate a guaranteed continuation of the RUSH, overwritten (especially in the case of 77%). Note that overwriting "77%" to "100%" is permitted.

Furthermore, even after reaching "77%" or "100%", the icon animation continues, although no further additions are made. This prevents the flow of the icon animation ending (at the end of round 8) and the jackpot judgment (round 9) from becoming too long, thus preventing players from losing interest in the animation.

Furthermore, after reaching "77%" or "100%", the "Rainbow" icon can be displayed. This prevents the icon animation from becoming bland when no additions are being made, and the special display of "Rainbow" creates a sense of excitement, suggesting that the RUSH mode is likely to continue, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53(e), in the case of "77%" (and similarly in the case of 100%), there were multiple rounds in which the continuation of RUSH was essentially guaranteed (rounds in which the 77% probability was reached). This allows attention to be drawn to each individual round, making the jackpot gameplay more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the percentage addition tables each contain 16 different addition patterns. This prevents players from easily predicting the final percentage based on the addition status, allowing them to purely enjoy the icon animations.

Furthermore, the icon type includes multiple colors, making it easier to select "green," "purple," or "red" as the added value increases. This draws attention to the color displayed as the icon (number image), enhancing the enjoyment of the game. The relationship of the expected value of the added value (color rule), such as "white" < "blue" < "green" < "red," is the same as the color rule in the aforementioned hold-prediction effect. This ensures that even with different effects, the color rule is maintained, providing a game machine that is easy for players to understand.

Furthermore, the icons (number images) can change from the start of display until they reach the target image. This prevents players from becoming discouraged even if an icon with a low expected value is displayed at the start of a round.

Furthermore, when addition is performed, an icon (number image) is displayed after it overlaps with the target image, followed by an addition message, and then the added value is announced. The addition message also includes messages that are easy to select based on the added value. This makes it easier to predict the added value when the addition message is displayed, making the addition process more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the addition icon position determination table, the "white" and "blue" icons for addition are made easier to display at the early counts (counts 2-3), the "yellow" and "green" icons for addition are made easier to display at the middle counts (counts 4-6), the "purple" icon for addition is made easier to display at the later counts (counts 5-9), and the "red" icon for addition is made easier to display at the end counts (counts 7-8). The reason for this tendency is, as mentioned above, at the start of the second round, number images 1-5 are visible, and when number images 6-10 in rounds 3-7 have been used up, number images 1-5 for the next round become visible. Therefore, in order to make the later number images 6-10 visible, it is necessary to get the ball into the big prize pocket. Thus, by making it easier to display icons with a high probability of addition at the later number images 6-10, it is possible to stimulate the desire to get the ball into the big prize pocket. This allows players to enjoy the thrill of winning big.

Furthermore, in the addition icon position determination table, none of the icons used for additions are placed at count 1 or count 10. The reason for this is, as mentioned above, in the case of special symbols D, F, and G (when icon effects may occur), the interval between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, enabling high-speed gameplay. However, this makes the boundary between the previous and subsequent rounds unclear. Consequently, if additions are made at count 1 or count 10, it becomes difficult to determine whether the addition occurred at count 10 in the previous round or at count 1 in the subsequent round. Therefore, by not placing icons at count 1 or count 10 when adding points, it becomes clear which round the addition occurred in, preventing any loss of enjoyment from the effect.

Furthermore, in the button selection table, if the final percentage is "77%", the "Lever" button is made easier to select, and "Button (Green)" and "Button (Red)" are also selectable. If the final percentage is "100%", only the "Lever" button is selected. This effectively enhances player satisfaction by encouraging them to operate the performance lever 15 as much as possible when the continuation of RUSH is guaranteed. Additionally, by making "Button (Green)" and "Button (Red)" selectable when the visually guaranteed element is lower than "100%", the excitement and suspense are maintained until the jackpot judgment is executed and the continuation of RUSH is announced.

Furthermore, at "60%" and "70%", selecting the "green button" is easier than at "80%" and "90%", while at "80%" and "90%", selecting the "red button" or "lever" is easier than at "60%" and "70%". This allows for jackpot judgments (button selections) to be made in accordance with the visually apparent numerical values, maintaining a balanced presentation and preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, although the icon animation for over-winning is not executed, the over-winning determination table still provides notification of the over-winning itself. Therefore, the player is informed of the over-winning without disrupting the icon animation, thus providing a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, the over-winning animation can be performed during the first and second big win rounds, but not during minor win rounds. This prevents the notification of the transition to the second big win round from becoming unclear.

Next, we will explain the title table (l) and the revival pattern determination table (m) in Figure 55.
The title table is a table that defines the titles displayed in the ending (see Figure 51(i)) and is stored in sub-ROM 202. A "title" is game result information displayed in conjunction with the acquired SCORE. For example, if the expected acquired SCORE is "2100" or more, the title "Initial Speed Gacha Gacha Man" will be displayed in the ending, and if the expected acquired SCORE is "3600" or more, the title "Acceleration Gacha Gacha Man" will be displayed in the ending. Furthermore, the number of consecutive wins indicates the number of times a jackpot 1 game or a jackpot 2 game is executed at the second starting gate 22. For example, if you hit special symbol A and transition to a time-saving game state, and then hit special symbol G and transition to a normal game state, the number of consecutive wins will be "1". In this case, the jackpot 1 game with special symbol A will be 4 rounds x 150 balls (number of balls obtained per round) for "600", and the minor win game to jackpot 2 game with special symbol G will be a total of 10 rounds x 150 balls (number of balls obtained per round) for "1500", so the expected SCORE is "2100" (600 + 1500).

The counter in the aforementioned sub-RAM 203 is updated from the start of RUSH until the end of RUSH due to the winning of special symbol G. When displaying a title, the counter value is referenced to select and display the corresponding title.

The "common to all modes" means that even if the mode in which you hit the special symbol G that ends RUSH is Mode A, if the expected SCORE is "2100", the title "Initial Speed Gacha Gacha Man" 1 will be displayed. Similarly, even if the mode in which you hit the special symbol G that ends RUSH is Mode B, if the expected SCORE is "2100", the title "Initial Speed Gacha Gacha Man" 1 will be displayed. In other words, the title displayed is the same regardless of which mode is selected.

Furthermore, the displayed title may differ for each mode. For example, even if the assumed SCORE is the same ("2100"), different titles may be displayed for Mode A and Mode B. This can improve the user's motivation to select a mode.

The title display changes color depending on the expected SCORE value. For example, title 1 displays "Initial Speed Gacha Gacha Man" in green, title 3 displays "Swift Gacha Gacha Man" in red, and title 7 displays "Rapid Gacha Gacha Man" in gold. The higher the expected SCORE value, the more decorative the title becomes. While the title table lists titles 1 through 8, there are multiple titles beyond title 8, all of which are written as "Gacha Gacha Man of XX," with only the "XX" part differing. Gold is the highest color used for display; there are no higher colors (titles 7 and above are always gold).

Although not explicitly stated in the title table, if the acquired SCORE reaches "99999", the acquired SCORE will no longer be updated even if subsequent Big Win 1 or Big Win 2 games are played. Therefore, the title display will continue to show the one corresponding to acquired SCORE "99999". For example, if "Godspeed Gacha Gacha Man" is available when SCORE reaches "99999", then in the state of "99999", for example, in the ending after Big Win 2 is played once, "Godspeed Gacha Gacha Man" will be displayed, and in the state of "99999", for example, in the ending after Big Win 2 is played twice, "Godspeed Gacha Gacha Man" will also be displayed. This means that when the updated SCORE display (e.g., "99999") stops updating, the title display also stops updating. This makes it easier for players to understand that both the SCORE and title display have reached their limits (upper limits), thus providing a greater sense of accomplishment. Furthermore, developers can reduce development effort and data size by eliminating the need to prepare an infinite number of title displays. The "Supersonic Gacha-Gacha Man" title may be positioned as a title displayed when the SCORE reaches "90000" or higher, or as a title displayed only when the SCORE reaches "99999".

Furthermore, the title may be displayed in relation to the number of consecutive wins. However, since there is a possibility that the amount of SCORE earned may not match the number of consecutive wins, for example, if a player forgets to put a ball into the big prize slot, displaying a title linked to the number of consecutive wins in such a situation may cause dissatisfaction among players. Therefore, it is preferable to link the title to the expected amount of SCORE earned.

The titles include revival titles, and in this embodiment, "revival title 1" and "revival title 2" are included. Revival titles are displayed in the ending screen and are shown in the same display position as title 1, etc. For example, Figure 51(k) shows the display of "revival title 1" in the ending screen, and it is displayed in approximately the same form as the display of title 1 in Figure 51(i). Therefore, at first glance, it is difficult to notice that the display in Figure 51(k) is indicating a revival.

The Revival title can be displayed regardless of the selected mode. As shown in Figure 55(m), it can be displayed when Revival is selected during the results display (either Revival title 1 or 2 is selected based on a predetermined distribution). The text color of the Revival title is gold, giving it the same decorative quality as titles 7 and beyond (highly decorative). For example, if the expected SCORE is "2100" but a gold title (Revival title) is displayed, the player is likely to feel a sense of incongruity. This incongruity serves as an indication of a Revival, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the Revival title uses the same decorative style as titles 7 and above (the most decorative gold), it is not limited to this; it may also be displayed with an even higher level of decorative style (for example, rainbow colors). This can improve the ease with which players notice the indication of a revival.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ending (ED) suggests a revival through the title display, while other game result information does not suggest a revival. However, this is not limited to this, and other game result information may also be used to suggest a revival. For example, in the ending (ED) of Figure 51(k), the RUSH measurement image 26ti, score image 26sc, win count image 26wi, title image 26sg, and ally character chaA are displayed. Of these, the RUSH measurement image 26ti may be used to suggest a revival. For example, a display that looks unusual, such as "02:77" or "02:VV," may be used to suggest a revival. Alternatively, the score image 26sc may be used to suggest a revival. For example, a display that looks unusual, such as "SCORE??????," may be used to suggest a revival. Also, the revival suggestion, including the title suggestion, may be performed by executing only one of them, or by executing two or more simultaneously.

On the other hand, we will not include any hints of revival from the victory count image (26wi) or from the ally character chaA. This will prevent players from overlooking revival hints, even if they are present, by limiting the areas they need to focus on.

Furthermore, while it may be possible to indicate revival through victory count image 26wi or ally character chaA, in this case, it is desirable not to include revival indications in the RUSH measurement image 26ti or score image 26sc, so as not to spread the player's attention too widely.

In the title table, it was explained that for title 1, the estimated SCORE is "2100" (600 + 1500), and that "1500" is added thereafter. However, for example, if the estimated SCORE is "2100" and "left-handed play" is performed, resulting in a special symbol win with special symbol A, and then one jackpot 2 game with special symbol F is executed, the estimated SCORE becomes "2100" + "600" + "1500" = "4200". In such a situation, when executing the ending ED, title 2 should be displayed. In other words, even if a special symbol win based on ball entry into the first starting gate 21 is executed exceptionally in the middle, the number of balls acquired during that jackpot 1 game can be included in the acquired SCORE, and it is also possible to display the title corresponding to that acquired SCORE. This allows players to increase their SCORE earnings even if they accidentally hit the ball left-handed and win a special prize, thus providing them with a sense of satisfaction.

As mentioned in the example where Title 2 is assigned when the expected acquired SCORE is "4200," titles can still be displayed even in exceptional cases of jackpot play. For example, Title 1 is assigned for "0-3599," Title 2 for "3600-5099," Title 3 for "5100-6599," and so on. In other words, even if a jackpot play occurs but the expected acquired SCORE is "0" (meaning no winning combinations were achieved), Title 1 can still be displayed.

Next, the (m) Revival Pattern Determination Table is a table used to announce the continuation of RUSH at the end of the game when the continuation of RUSH is confirmed but not announced until the end of the game due to presentation reasons. This table is stored in sub-ROM 202. As explained in Figure 51, the continuation announcement at the end of the game includes revival at the start of the ending and revival during the result display. The selection ratio of these revivals changes depending on the number of consecutive wins.

For example, if you have finished two consecutive wins, you would select "90/100" for revival at the start of the ending and "10/100" for revival while the results are being displayed.
If it's after three consecutive wins, select "80/100" for revival at the start of the ending and "20/100" for revival during the results display.
If it's after a 4-win streak, select "70/100" for revival at the start of the ending, and select "30/100" for revival during the results display.
If it's after a 5-win streak, select "60/100" for revival at the start of the ending and "40/100" for revival during the results display.
If it's after 6 consecutive wins, select "50/100" for revival at the start of the ending, and select "50/100" for revival while the results are being displayed.
For example, at the end of a 7-win streak, there's a 40/100 chance of choosing to revive at the start of the ending, and a 60/100 chance of choosing to revive during the results display. The more consecutive wins you have, the more likely you are to choose to revive during the results display.

Furthermore, the selection ratio of revival patterns may be changed as appropriate. It may remain constant regardless of the number of consecutive wins, or there may be revival patterns that are easier to select depending on the number of consecutive wins. It may also be made easier to select a revival at the start of the ending as the number of consecutive wins increases.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 55(n), if "Revival" is selected during the results display, either Revival Title 1 or Revival Title 2 is selected, and Title 1, etc., are not selected. In other words, if "Revival" is selected during the results display, either Revival Title 1 or Revival Title 2 will always be displayed.
Furthermore, even if the revival option is selected during the results display, a title corresponding to the expected acquired SCORE (such as Title 1) may be displayed, and then the revival animation shown in Figure 51(l) may be executed.

Figure 55(o) shows the revival route. If the special symbol is D, or if the mode is A and the final percentage is "77%" or "100%", the revival at the end of the ending sequence will not occur, and the continuation of RUSH will always be announced during the jackpot judgment in the 9th round. On the other hand, if the mode is A and the final percentage is anything other than "77%" or "100%", the revival at the end of the ending sequence may occur (only if the special symbol F is determined) (the distribution of whether the continuation is announced during the jackpot judgment or at the end of the ending sequence is at the player's discretion). Also, in mode B, if failure is announced in the 9th round, or in mode C, if defeat is announced in the 9th round, the revival at the end of the ending sequence may occur (only if the special symbol F is determined) (the distribution of whether the continuation is announced during the jackpot judgment or at the end of the ending sequence is at the player's discretion).

The following effects can be expected from Figure 55 above.
In the title table, titles are now displayed in conjunction with the acquired SCORE. This ensures that players see titles corresponding to the actual SCORE they have earned, thus providing a sense of satisfaction to the players.

Furthermore, the displayed title changes each time a jackpot (either 1 or 2) is achieved by inserting a game ball into the second starting slot 22. For example, when a jackpot (1 or 2) is achieved by inserting a ball into the second starting slot 22, 1500 SCORE is added, and this addition of 1500 changes the title. This means that a different title may be displayed each time RUSH is played, potentially increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, titles are now displayed in relation to the acquired SCORE, and not in relation to the number of consecutive wins. This prevents situations where a high-ranking title is displayed despite a significantly low acquired SCORE (for example, displaying "Fastest Gacha-Gacha Man" with only around 3000 SCORE).

Furthermore, the titles are displayed in a more decorative way (green < red < gold) as the acquired SCORE increases. This allows players who achieve high SCORE acquisitions to feel a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, regardless of whether Mode A, Mode C, or Mode C is selected, the title shown in Figure 55 will be displayed. For example, whether Mode A is selected and the acquired SCORE is "2100", or Mode C is selected and the acquired SCORE is "2100", the title "Initial Speed Gacha Gacha Man" will be displayed in both cases. This prevents situations where a title cannot be obtained depending on the mode, and avoids requiring players to perform the cumbersome operation of changing modes to obtain a title. In addition, since the title display process does not require judgment of which mode was selected, but simply displays the acquired SCORE, the control process can be simplified.

Furthermore, the revived title is displayed in the same location as the first-place title. This means that, at first glance, it looks identical to the first-place title, requiring users to carefully examine the title's content, thus piquing their interest.

Furthermore, the title display now uses the same highly decorative color (gold) as the titles from rank 7 onwards. This prevents situations where players might not even notice the hints of a revival.

Furthermore, the Revival Title is displayed regardless of whether Mode A, Mode C, or Mode C is selected, as shown in Figure 55. For example, even if Mode A or Mode C is selected, if Revival is selected during the results display, "Revival Gacha Gacha Man" can be displayed. This prevents situations where a Revival Title cannot be obtained depending on the mode, and avoids requiring players to perform the cumbersome operation of changing modes to obtain a Revival Title. Additionally, the control process is simplified by eliminating the need to determine which mode was selected when displaying the Revival Title.

Furthermore, in the ending sequence, we've included elements that suggest a revival (revival title) and elements that do not (RUSH measurement image 26ti, score image 26sc, win count image 26wi, ally character chaA). This prevents players from overlooking revival hints due to having too many areas to focus on.

Furthermore, the revival pattern determination table now selects a revival pattern based on the number of consecutive wins. In particular, as the number of consecutive wins increases, the tendency to select a revival during the results display rather than a revival at the start of the ending is increased. This allows the player to maintain a sense of suspense until the very end of the ending (9 seconds into the ending where the outcome branches between revival and game over), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if, during the results screen, players can choose not only the revival title but also the top-ranked title, the opportunities to see a variety of titles will increase, thus providing greater satisfaction to players. In particular, achieving a long winning streak is statistically difficult, and titles that can only be seen after achieving such a streak are valuable to players. Increasing the opportunities to see such titles will further enhance the satisfaction of players who achieve a long winning streak.

Figure 56 shows the mode selection presentation for each mode, Figure 57 shows the presentation for each mode during the time-saving game state (presentation during RUSH), and Figure 58 shows the presentation status monitoring process related to mode selection.
As mentioned above, during RUSH in this embodiment, there are modes A (icon presentation), mode B (post-announcement), and mode C (battle announcement). Of these, the icon presentation is as described in Figure 50, etc., while the post-announcement and battle announcement modes allow you to confirm the continuation of RUSH at either the 9th round or the ending. In other words, in the icon presentation mode A, the initial percentage may be "100%" in the 2nd round, or from the 3rd round onwards, the continuation suggestion image 26ks may become "77%" or "100%", effectively confirming the continuation of RUSH (effectively allowing you to confirm the continuation of RUSH). However, in the post-announcement and battle announcement modes, you can confirm the continuation of RUSH at either the 9th round or the ending, and in rounds 2 to 8, you cannot effectively confirm the continuation of RUSH. Furthermore, if a continuous notification is given, if it is a post-notification, an animation will be performed in the 9th round in which the "V" image is obtained, and if it is a battle notification, an animation will be performed in the 9th round in which the allied character defeats the enemy character.

Furthermore, both post-announcement and battle-announcement methods allow for suggesting continuation from rounds 2 through 8. For example, with post-announcement, you could suggest continuation by displaying an image indicating the acquisition of a "V" image. With battle-announcement, you could show which character is winning during the battle sequence between allied and enemy characters from rounds 2 through 8, thus suggesting continuation.

In other words, in Mode A, as shown in Figure 56, mode selection is only possible in the second round if the displayed initial percentage is "100%". On the other hand, while it was mentioned that the continuation of RUSH is essentially guaranteed even when the initial percentage is "0%", mode selection is not possible in the case of "0%" because the apparent guarantee is lower compared to "100%".

Furthermore, in rounds 3 through 8, if the percentage reaches "77%" or "100%" (including cases where the initial percentage is 100%), it becomes possible to select a mode after reaching that point. On the other hand, in cases other than these examples, mode selection is not possible in rounds 2 through 8; for example, even if the final percentage is "90%", mode selection is not possible.

Then, in the 9th round, a jackpot judgment is made, and if the continuation of RUSH is announced, mode selection becomes possible in the 10th round. In other words, if the continuation of RUSH is effectively confirmed, mode selection is possible even in rounds 2 through 8, and if the continuation of RUSH is not effectively confirmed, mode selection is not possible in rounds 2 through 8. Furthermore, mode selection is possible when the continuation of RUSH is definitively announced (round 10). Note that if a revival at the start of the ending or a revival during the results display is selected, mode selection is not possible in round 10.

Next, in Mode B (post-announcement) and Mode C (battle announcement), mode selection is impossible from rounds 2 to 8, regardless of the situation (for example, if the allied character is winning in Mode C). A judgment is made during the big win in round 9, and if the continuation of RUSH is announced, mode selection becomes possible in round 10. In other words, mode selection is only possible in the situation where the continuation of RUSH is definitively announced (round 10). Therefore, the timing of mode selection varies depending on the mode (mode A) or is fixed (modes B and C). Note that if revival at the start of the ending or revival during the results display is selected, mode selection is impossible in round 10.

Figures 56(a) and (b) show an example of a situation in Mode A where mode selection becomes possible. For example, it is assumed that after adding points in the third round, the continuation suggestion image 26ks reaches "77%". Specifically, in (a), "+7%" is displayed, then it moves to the continuation suggestion image 26ks, showing "77%". Then, in (b), a new mode changeable image 26mh is displayed on the image display device 26. At this time, the left and right directional buttons 16 are also activated. When the player operates the left or right directional buttons 16, the mode switches sequentially between Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The selection operation is possible until the valid operation time for mode selection has elapsed. Once the valid operation time has elapsed, the currently selected mode is determined. In other words, this differs from the mode selection method described in Figure 48 in that the performance button 14 is not pressed. This prevents players from mistaking the press of the performance button 14 for a jackpot judgment.

Similarly, Figures 56(a') and (b') show an example of a scenario in Mode B where mode selection becomes possible, and in the 10th round, a new mode changeable image 26mh is displayed on the image display device 26. The rest is the same as in Figures 56(a) and (b).

The mode changeable image 26mh is displayed at the same size as the score image 26sc, and is not displayed in a conspicuous manner (size, color). Furthermore, it does not prominently announce that mode selection is possible upon display commencement; it is simply displayed in the manner shown in Figures 56(b) and (b').

The mode is reflected not only during jackpot gameplay but also during time-saving gameplay. For example, Figures 57(a1) and (a2) show the state during time-saving gameplay in Mode A, Figures 57(b1) and (b2) show the state during time-saving gameplay in Mode B, and Figures 57(c1) and (c2) show the state during time-saving gameplay in Mode C.

In other words, when Mode A is selected, icon animations are performed during jackpot gameplay, and a straight road background is displayed during time-saving gameplay. When Mode B is selected, post-jackpot announcements are performed during jackpot gameplay, and a garage background is displayed during time-saving gameplay. When Mode C is selected, battle announcements are performed during jackpot gameplay, and a mountain background is displayed during time-saving gameplay.

During the time-saving game mode, as shown in Figure 7, the reels fluctuate every second, and the game is designed to result in either a special win or a minor win. Therefore, as soon as the game transitions to the time-saving game mode, for example, "777" is displayed as a confirmed result, and the game returns to either a major win (Game 1) or a minor win followed by a major win (Game 2). Consequently, no major win announcements or effects are performed in the background during the time-saving game mode, and the background during this mode is not particularly important to the player. Therefore, mode selection is impossible during the time-saving game mode. Mode selection is intended to be performed during a major win to select the notification method for the next major win (the notification method for whether or not RUSH will continue).

In other words, when a mode is selected, the player can at least play the next jackpot game in that selected mode, preventing situations where the mode selection has little impact and discourages the player from choosing a mode.

Furthermore, if special symbols D or F are determined and the continuation of RUSH is confirmed, in Mode A, the mode changeable image 26mh may be displayed during or before the start of the icon animation. In Modes B and C, the mode changeable image 26mh may be displayed before the judgment during the jackpot. This allows the player to recognize the high probability of RUSH continuation by the sudden display of the mode changeable image 26mh, and then proceed with the icon animation, etc. Additionally, at the end of the game (ED), the game may build anticipation by asking whether or not the mode changeable image 26mh will be displayed. If it is displayed, it serves as a continuation notification; if it is not displayed, it serves as a non-continuation notification.

Next, Figure 58 shows the performance status monitoring process, which is a subroutine in step S305 of Figure 27. The performance status monitoring process monitors the performance status and activates the mode selection if the selection conditions are met; it is a control process for realizing Figure 56.

(Step 305-1)
In step S305-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a jackpot 1 game is currently in progress. If a jackpot 1 game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S305-2; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S305-4.

(Step 305-2)
In step S305-2, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the RUSH acquisition notification has been made. For example, in the case of special symbol A, it determines whether the notification of transition to RUSH was executed in the 3rd round, and in the case of special symbol D, it determines whether the notification of transition to RUSH was executed in the 9th round. If the RUSH acquisition notification has been made, the process proceeds to step S305-3, and if the RUSH acquisition notification has not been made, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step 305-3)
In step S305-3, the sub-CPU 201 executes a mode selection activation process. Specifically, it enables operation using the directional key buttons 16, allowing the player to select a mode. This activation is then maintained until the upper limit round is completed. After this process is completed, the process moves to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step 305-4)
In step S305-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the game is in the middle of a jackpot 2. If it is, the process proceeds to step S305-5; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step 305-5)
In step S305-5, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the RUSH continuation notification has been issued, whether mode A is selected and has reached 77%, or whether mode A is selected and has reached 100%. If any of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step 305-6; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step 305-6)
In step S305-6, the sub-CPU 201 executes a mode selection activation process. Specifically, it enables operation using the directional key buttons 16, allowing the player to select a mode. This activation is then maintained until the upper limit round is completed. After this process is completed, the process moves to step S306 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

The following effects can be expected from Figures 56 to 58 above.
In Mode A, once the continuation of RUSH is confirmed, mode selection becomes possible (the period during which mode selection is possible can be brought forward), while in Modes B and C, it is fixed at 10 rounds. This means that if Mode A is selected, the time after the continuation of RUSH is confirmed can be used effectively (the freedom of mode selection can be increased), preventing players from becoming bored. On the other hand, in Modes B and C, since the mode selection is fixed at 10 rounds, for example in Mode C, it is possible to prevent players from becoming distracted by the battle notification animations.

Furthermore, the mode selection is now possible only after the continuation of RUSH is confirmed or after the RUSH continuation notification has been issued. This prevents, for example, the display of the mode change option image 26mh during the icon animation when mode A is selected, thus preventing the outcome of the icon animation from being revealed prematurely. Similarly, it prevents, for example, the display of the mode change option image 26mh before the jackpot judgment when mode B is selected, thus preventing the outcome of the jackpot judgment from being revealed prematurely.

Furthermore, mode selection is now possible only when a win in the next minor bonus round is guaranteed. This allows players to enjoy a sense of superiority while playing in their preferred mode during the RUSH mode for a certain period, thereby further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the mode changeable image (26mh) is not displayed in prominent or overtly advertising manners. This prevents users from being distracted and missing other features.

Furthermore, for example, in Mode A, after displaying "77%", the mode change option image 26mh is displayed. This means that the display of the mode change option image 26mh (for example, an image prompting action) effectively indicates a confirmed continuation of RUSH mode, thus attracting the player's attention beyond simply prompting action.

Furthermore, in the performance status monitoring process, the mode selection activation process is now executed after monitoring the performance status. This effectively allows for mode selection to be executed without delay after the continuation of RUSH mode is confirmed or after the RUSH continuation notification is given, thus providing players with even greater satisfaction.

Figures 59 and 60 are schematic diagrams relating to the measurement animation during RUSH (the animation that displays the RUSH measurement image 26ti mentioned above).
In Case 1, a jackpot game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot game ends at timing (b), the game enters a time-saving mode. At this time, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated) on the image display device 26.

Then, when a minor win is achieved at timing (c) and the second big win game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Meanwhile, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update. Then, when the second big win game ends at timing (d), the time-saving game state returns. Here too, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update.

Then, at timing (e), if a minor win is achieved and the second big win game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state turns OFF. Here, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update. Then, at timing (f), when the second big win game ends, the time-saving game state returns. Here, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update. Note that at timing (f), the player does not launch any game balls, and the demo performance begins. Even when the demo performance begins, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update.

Then, when a minor win is achieved at timing (g) and the big win 2 game (special symbol G) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Here, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti continue, but since the special symbol G corresponds to the normal game state, when the big win 2 game ends at timing (h), the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) stops and the measurement time at that time is displayed as "End ED".
Thus, a key feature of Case 1 is that measurement and updated display continue even if a demo performance is executed during measurement.

In Case 2, a jackpot game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot game ends at timing (b), the game enters a time-saving mode. At this time, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated) on the image display device 26.

Then, when a minor win is achieved at timing (c) and the second major win game (special symbol F) is executed, the time-saving game state is turned OFF. Meanwhile, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update. Then, when the second major win game ends at timing (d), the time-saving game state returns. Here too, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti continues to update. In this time-saving game state, it is assumed that the player has shot the ball to the left and entered the first starting opening 21.

When a game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 21, a special symbol win occurs, and the first big win game is executed from timing (e), the time-saving game state is turned OFF, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) is interrupted, and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti is also interrupted (hidden). Then, from timing (f) when the first big win game is completed, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti are resumed. The rest is the same as in Case 1, so the explanation is omitted.
Thus, a key feature of Case 2 is that if a jackpot is won during the measurement process, the measurement and update display are interrupted.

In Case 3, a jackpot game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot game ends at timing (b), the game enters a time-saving mode. At this time, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated) on the image display device 26.

The timings (c) to (e) are the same as in Case 1, so their explanation is omitted. The subsequent timings (f) to (g) indicate the execution of the ending sequence, assuming that a revival occurred at the start of the ending or during the result display. During (f) to (g), the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti is interrupted, but the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) continues to measure. As a result, in the ending sequence, the time paused at timing (f) (RUSH measurement image 26ti) will be displayed in the result screen.

Then, at timing (g), the game returns to the time-saving game state and resumes updating and displaying the RUSH measurement image 26ti. In this case, the value of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) at timing (g) is referenced and the referenced value is displayed. The subsequent (h) and (i) are the same as (g) and (h) in case 1, so the explanation is omitted.
Thus, a key feature of Case 3 is that if the termination command (ED) is executed during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display is interrupted.

In Case 4, a jackpot game (special symbol A) is executed at timing (a), and when the jackpot game ends at timing (b), the game enters a time-saving mode. At this time, the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) starts measuring, and the RUSH measurement image 26ti is displayed (updated) on the image display device 26.

Timings (c) to (e) are the same as in Case 1, so the explanation is omitted. At the subsequent timing (e), it is assumed that the player has shot the ball to the left and entered the first starting opening 21. However, unlike in Case 2, it is assumed that the special symbol did not hit, but rather missed. In this case, at timings (e) to (f), the symbol variation game of special symbol 1 will be executed, and during this time, the measurement of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) and the update display of the RUSH measurement image 26ti will continue. At the subsequent (g) and (h), it is the same as (g) and (h) in Case 1, so the explanation is omitted.
Thus, a key feature of Case 4 is that if a symbol variation game corresponding to Special Symbol 1 is executed during measurement, the measurement and update display will continue.

Figures 59 and 60 above show the following expected effects.
Even if a demo sequence is executed during the shortened play time state, measurement and update display will continue. This allows the RUSH duration, including the execution of the demo sequence, to be displayed, enabling accurate recognition of the RUSH duration. Furthermore, it eliminates the need to interrupt measurement and update display when a demo sequence has started, simplifying the control process.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is triggered during measurement, the measurement and update display are interrupted. This allows for the exclusion of exceptional jackpot games, enabling the display of purely the duration of a series of RUSH events. Additionally, the interruption of the update display serves to inform the player if an inefficient game is being played.

Furthermore, if the game ends during measurement, the measurement continues and the update display is interrupted. When the update display resumes, it references the value of the RUSH timer counter (sub-RAM 203) that was being continuously measured. This prevents the update display from continuing during the game's ending result, which could cause confusion for the player. It also allows the display to take the interrupted time into account when resuming, further preventing confusion for the player.

Furthermore, if a symbol variation game corresponding to special symbol 1 is executed during measurement, the measurement and update display will continue. This allows for a uniform measurement during the time-saving game state, simplifying the control process.

In Case 1, measurement and display updates were kept continuous during the demo, but they may be interrupted. This allows for the display of the time the game ball is launched into the game area 7, enabling a more precise understanding of the RUSH duration.

Furthermore, in Case 2, at timings (e) to (f), measurement and update display were interrupted during the first big win game, but they may be continued. This can reduce the discomfort caused to the player.
In Case 2, if special symbol A is selected, measurement and update display may be continued, while if special symbol B is selected, measurement and update display may be stopped (terminated). This allows whether or not the update display is continued to indicate the continuation of RUSH, giving the measurement image 26ti during RUSH an aspect (role) other than time display, thereby broadening the range of presentation.

Furthermore, in Case 3, if the termination (ED) is executed during measurement, the measurement is continued and the update display is interrupted. However, the update display may be continued only if the revival animation (revival during result display) is executed. This means that if time is not stopped during the result display, the revival animation will be executed afterward, allowing the measurement image 26ti during RUSH to have aspects (roles) other than time display, thus broadening the range of animations.

Furthermore, in Case 4, if a symbol variation game corresponding to Special Symbol 1 is executed during measurement, the measurement and update display are kept running. However, the update display may be interrupted. This allows the system to indicate that suboptimal gameplay is occurring by interrupting (hiding) the update display.

The following are some other variations.
The icon animation may be performed not only when special symbols D, F, and G appear, but also when special symbols A and B appear, and may also be performed during symbol variation games in normal gameplay or time-saving gameplay states.

The icon animation uses an additive update for the percentage display, but a subtractive update would also work. It could also be implemented using a quantitative display (e.g., a meter) rather than just a percentage, or through an animation that brings multiple characters together (e.g., continuation upon gathering).

The icon animation updates using a percentage display, but it could also be done by gradually increasing the color of, for example, the character panel image. The character panel image could also be updated by changing between "white," "blue," "green," "red," and "gold."

The icon display is set to update sequentially when a ball enters the main prize slot, but it may also be updated sequentially when a ball enters the second starting slot 22, or when a ball enters the regular prize slot 23.

The icon animation may be updated sequentially by operating the animation button 14 or the animation lever 15. For example, the animation could be updated by operating the animation button 14 a predetermined number of times in each round, or it could be updated if the animation button 14 is pressed at the right time when the icon overlaps with the target image.

The prize-winning emphasis effect is triggered by a ball entering the first major prize-winning slot 24, but it is not limited to this. For example, the prize-winning emphasis effect could also be triggered by a ball entering the second starting slot 22 or the regular prize-winning slot 23.

Furthermore, although this embodiment describes the specifications for a Type 1 and Type 2 mixed machine, it may also be applied to a probability variation loop type machine that features a probability variation game state and where the probability variation game state loops, or to an ST probability variation type machine where the maximum number of executions of the symbol variation game in the probability variation game state is defined. It may also be applied to a sealed-type pachinko machine that does not discharge game balls outside the machine.

Furthermore, although this embodiment uses a pachinko machine as an example, the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to revolving-type gaming machines (slot machines), jankyu gaming machines, and arrangement ball gaming machines.

Details of the means and other aspects described in the above-mentioned gaming machine will be explained below.
A large prize slot (second large prize slot 32) having a specific area (V prize slot) into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means (main CPU 101) that acquires judgment information (random value for special symbol win judgment) when the acquisition condition is met (game ball enters the second start slot 22), a judgment means (main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to execute a predetermined game (minor win game) that allows a game ball to enter the specific area based on the judgment information, and a special game (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific area in the predetermined game. The system includes a special game control means (main CPU 101) that controls the execution of two games, and an effect control means (sub-CPU 201) that controls the execution of effects. The effect control means is capable of executing an indication effect (icon effect) that suggests the possibility of the predetermined game being executed, and an entry promotion effect (Aim for V effect) that encourages the entry of game balls into the specific area in the predetermined game. After the execution of the entry promotion effect is completed, the system can start executing the indication effect (the icon effect starts from the second round).

1. Pachinko game machine 26. Image display device 100. Main control board 200. Performance control board.

Claims (1)

A specific area into which the game ball can enter,
A region different from the aforementioned specific region, which is a normal region into which game balls can be entered,
A means for acquiring judgment information when the acquisition conditions are met,
A predetermined game control means that controls the execution of a predetermined game that allows game balls to enter the specific area based on the determination information,
A special game control means that controls the execution of a special game advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific area in the predetermined game,
A performance control means for controlling the execution of the performance,
It is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by the player,
If the game ball does not enter the specified area during the predetermined game, the special game will not be performed.
The aforementioned performance control means is
It is possible to display predetermined information regarding the value of the game,
In the aforementioned predetermined game, it is possible to perform an action to encourage the entry of game balls into the specific area,
When a game ball enters the aforementioned specific area, a ball entry notification animation can be executed.
When the ball entry promotion animation is being performed in the aforementioned predetermined game, the aforementioned predetermined information is not displayed.
When the aforementioned ball entry notification animation is being performed, the predetermined information is not displayed.
When the special game is executed after the predetermined game has finished, the predetermined information is displayed, and when a game ball enters the normal area during the execution of the special game, the predetermined information can be updated and displayed.
During the execution of the special game, a predetermined performance can be performed that causes the user to operate the control means.
Even if the operating means is not operated in the predetermined performance, the result of the predetermined performance can be notified.
It is possible to display the predetermined information during the execution of the predetermined performance, and when a game ball enters the normal area, the predetermined information can be updated and displayed .
If the game value of the predetermined information reaches a predetermined upper limit due to the update display, the update display will not be performed even if a game ball enters the normal area thereafter.
It is possible to perform a pre-announcement effect that suggests the likelihood of the aforementioned special game being played,
It is possible to execute a specific reach animation that notifies whether or not the aforementioned special game will be performed,
The aforementioned preview effect is
There is a first trailer sequence and a second trailer sequence that is different from the first trailer sequence.
The aforementioned first trailer was,
There are cases in which the first予告演出 (preview effect) is performed using a predetermined color, and cases in which the first preview effect is performed using a specific color different from the predetermined color.
The aforementioned second trailer production was,
There are cases in which the second予告演出 (preview performance) is performed using the predetermined color, and cases in which the second preview performance is performed using the specific color.
The probability of the special game being played is higher when the first予告演出 (preview performance) using the specified color is performed a second time, which is more than the first time, compared to when the first preview performance using the specified color is performed a first time.
Whether the second予告演出 (preview performance) using the specified color is performed a first time, or whether the second preview performance using the specified color is performed a second time, which is more than the first time, the probability of the special game being performed remains constant.
The first pre-announcement effect can be executed before the execution of the specific reach effect, the first pre-announcement effect is not executed during the execution of the specific reach effect, the second pre-announcement effect can be executed during the execution of the specific reach effect, and the second pre-announcement effect is not executed before the execution of the specific reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.